BID/ACCEPTANCE FORM 2GENERAL CONDITIONS 12UNCG SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 4
CONTRACT FORMS
GUIDELINES FOR RECRUITMENT & SELECTION OF MINORITY BUSINESSES 5MINORITY BUSINESS CONTRACT PROVISIONS (CONSTRUCTION) 1MINIMUM COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS 1APPENDIX “E” - MBE Documentation for Contract Payments 1IDENTIFICATION OF HUB CERTIFIED / MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION 1MBE/HUB AFFIDAVIT “A” - Listing of Good Faith Efforts 1MBE/HUB AFFIDAVIT “B” - Intent to Perform Contract with Own Workforce 1MBE/HUB AFFIDAVIT “C” - Portion of the Work to be Performed by HUB Cert./Min. Businesses 1MBE/HUB AFFIDAVIT “D” - Good Faith Efforts 2SHEET FOR ATTACHING POWER OF ATTORNEY 1SHEET FOR ATTACHING INSURANCE CERTIFICATES 1
006276 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF PAYMENT FORM 1006276.10 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SALES TAX REPORTING FORM 1006276.13 SALES TAX REPORTING FORM 2
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011100 SCOPE OF WORK 1012633 CHANGE ORDERS 1013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES 3014300 QUALITY CONTROL 2015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 4015000.1 UNCG FALL 2016 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2015000.2 UNCG SPRING 2018 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 3017000 EXECUTION AND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1
072116 FIBERGLASS INSULATION 3079200 CAULKING AND SEALANTS 3
DIVISION 08 DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
081100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2082000 WOOD DOORS 2083300 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES 2087000 FINISHED HARDWARE 4088100 GLASS AND GLAZING 4088700 PRIVACY CONTROL WINDOW FILM 1
101400 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS 4102613 PROTECTIVE CORNER GUARDS 3105500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 1
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK 11
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
INDEX NUMBER OF PAGES
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISIONS 15-20
THESE DIVISIONS NOT USED
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 COVER SHEET AND INDEX TO DIVISION 21 & 23 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS 1210500 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 7211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 3
260000 COVER SHEET AND INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS 1260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 5260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 5260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5260923 NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 6262726 WIRING DEVICES 7265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 9
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
INDEX NUMBER OF PAGES
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISIONS 32 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
THIS DIVISION NOT USED
DIVISIONS 33-49
THESE DIVISIONS NOT USED
000115-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 000115 DRAWINGS ACCOMPANYING THESE SPECIFICATIONS
General Construction
Sheet: Title:
T1 COVER SHEETT2 APPENDIX B - BUILDING CODE SUMMARY
A1 BUILDING FLOOR PLANA2 LARGE SCALE FLOOR PLANA3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, INTERIOR
ELEVATION, DETAILSA4 DOOR & FRAME SCHEDULE, DETAILSA5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONSA6 DETAILS
FP-1 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN
M1 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - HVACM2 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - HVAC PIPINGM3 HVAC DETAILS AND SCHEDULES
E1 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND SCHEDULESE2 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANE3 POWER, LIGHTING PLAN, POWER PLAN, PANELBOARD SCHEDULEE4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
End of Section
004526-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 004526 IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT CERTIFICATION
IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT CERTIFICATIONREQUIRED BY N.C.G.S. 143C-6A-5(a)
As of the date listed below, the vendor or bidder listed above is not listed on the FinalDivestment List created by the State Treasurer pursuant to N.C.G.S. 143-6A-4. The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she is authorized by the vendor or bidder listedabove to make the foregoing statement.
Signature Date
Printed Name Title
Notes to persons signing this form: N.C.G.S. 143C-6A-5(a) requires this certification for bids or contracts with the State of NorthCarolina, a North Carolina local government, or any other political subdivision of the State ofNorth Carolina. The certification is required at the following times: · When a bid is submitted · When a contract is entered into (if the certification was not already made when the vendormade its bid)· When a contract is renewed or assigned N.C.G.S. 143C-6A-5(b) requires that contractors with the State, a North Carolina localgovernment, or any other political subdivision of the State of North Carolina must not utilize anysubcontractor found on the State Treasurer’s Final Divestment List. The State Treasurer’s Final Divestment List can be found on the State Treasurer’s website atthe address www.nctreasurer.com/Iran and will be updated every 180 days.
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
STANDARD FORM OF INFORMAL CONTRACT
AND GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR
The University of North Carolina at GreensboroBusiness Center Upfit
Moran Commons - UNCGSCO ID # : 16-15976-01A
SCOPE OF WORK
The Project will involve upfiting approximately 4,293 square feet on the lower floor of the MoranCommons building to accommodate the new campus business center. The work will involve installingnew drywall partitions, new wood doors, hollow metal frames, roll-up shutter, casework, repair to theexisting plaster, caulking and sealants, carpeting, painting, installation and modification of existingmechanical and electrical systems currently in place to accommodate the new work all as noted on thedrawings and described in the specifications.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed bid for this work will be received by:
Mr. Scott NobleDepartment of Engineering and Construction Management
The University of North Carolina at Greensboro105 Gray Drive - UNCG, Greensboro, NC 27412
Telephone: (336) 334-5269 / FAX: (336) 334-3212
up to 3:00 PM local time, on Wednesday, October 05, 2016 and immediately thereafter publiclyopened and read aloud. Complete plans and specification and contract documents can be obtained from
Ricky L. Loman, AIA Architect603 Summit Avenue, Suite 102
Contractors are hereby notified that they must have proper license under the State laws governing theirrespective trades and that North Carolina General Statute 87 will be observed in receiving and awardingcontracts. General Contractors must have general license classification for Limited Building .
No bid may be withdrawn after the opening of bids for a period of 30 days. The Owner reserves the rightto reject any or all bids and waive informalities. Bids shall be made only on the BID/ACCEPTANCE formprovided herein with all blank spaces for bids properly filled in and all signatures properly executed.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 1
Please note on the envelope – Bid : Attn: Mr. Scott NobleBusiness Center UpfitMoran Commons - UNCG1209 North Drive, Greensboro, NC 27412-5042Bid Date: Contractor:License Number
Pre-Bid MeetingAn open pre-bid meeting will be held for all interested bidders at the Gray Home Management House,105 Gray Drive, Greensboro, NC 27412 on Wednesday, September 14, 2016, at 3:00 PM local time. The meeting will address project specific questions, issues, bidding procedures and bid forms.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 2
BID/ACCEPTANCE FORMfor
Business Center UpfitMoran Commons - UNCGSCO ID#: 16-15976-01A
The Project involves upfiting approximately 4,293 square feet on the lower floor of the Moran Commonsbuilding to accommodate the new campus business center. The work will involve installing new drywallpartitions, new wood doors, hollow metal frames, repair to the existing plaster, caulking and sealants,carpeting, painting, installation and modification of existing mechanical and electrical systems currently inplace to accommodate the new work all as noted on the drawings and described in the specifications.
We are in receipt of Addendum _________1________2_________3_________4
The undersigned, as bidder, proposes and agrees if this bid is accepted to contract with the State ofNorth Carolina through the University of North Carolina at Greensboro for the furnishing of allmaterials, equipment, and labor necessary to complete the construction of the work described in thesedocuments in full and complete accordance with plans, specifications, and contract documents, and tothe full and entire satisfaction of the State of North Carolina and the University of North Carolina atGreensboro, Greensboro, NC 27412 for the sum of:
BASE BID: Dollars $
Alternate # Add/Deduct Alternate bidprice
Accepted (OWNER INITIALS ONEACH LINE INDICATESACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATE)
1Add or Deduct toprovide SchneiderElectric for the DDCautomation controlsystem in the area ofrenovation, the systemcurrently in place in thisbuilding
Respectively submitted this day of _____ _ _______20
__(Contractor’s Name)
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 3
Federal ID#: By:
Witness: Title: (Owner, partner, corp. Pres. Or Vice President)
Address:(Proprietorship or Partnership)
Attest: (corporation) Email Address:
(Corporate Seal)
By: License #:
Title: (Corporation, Secretary./Ass't Secretary.)
ACCEPTED by the STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA through the
Total amount of accepted by the owner, included base bid and bid alternates:________________________
(Agency/Institution)
BY: TITLE:
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 4
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S
1. GENERAL
It is understood and agreed that by submitting a bid that the Contractor has examined these contract documents,drawings and specifications and has visited the site of the Work, and has satisfied himself relative to the Work to beperformed.
2. DEFINITIONS
Owner: "Owner" shall mean, The State of North Carolina through The University of North Carolina at Greensboro.
Contractor: "Contractor" shall mean the entity that will provide the services for the Owner.
Designer: The designer(s) are those referred to within this contract, or their authorized representatives. TheDesigner(s), as referred to herein, shall mean architect and/or engineer responsible for preparing the project plansand specifications. They will be referred to hereinafter as if each were of the singular number, masculine gender.
Contract Documents: “Contract Documents” shall consist of the Notice to Bidders; General Conditions of theContract; special conditions if applicable; Supplementary General Conditions; the drawing and specifications,including all bulletins, addenda or other modifications of the drawings and specifications incorporated into thedocuments prior to their execution; the bid; the contract; the performance bond if applicable; and insurancecertificates. All of these items together form the contract.
INTENT AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS
The drawings and specifications are complementary, one to the other. That which is shown on the drawings orcalled for in the specifications shall be as binding as if it were both called for and shown. The intent of the drawingsand specifications is to establish the scope of all labor, materials, transportation, equipment, and any and all otherthings necessary to provide a complete job. In case of discrepancy or disagreement in the Contract Documents, theorder of precedence shall be: Form of Contract, specifications, large-scale detail drawings, small-scale drawings.
In such cases where the nature of the work requires clarification by the Designer/ Owner, the Designer/ Owner shallfurnish such clarification. Clarifications and drawings shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents,and shall become a part thereof.
4. AS-BUILT MARKED-UP CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Contractor shall provide one complete set of legible “as-built” marked-up construction drawings andspecifications recording any and all changes made to the original design during the course of construction. Inthe event no changes occurred, submit construction drawings and specifications set with notation “NoChanges.” The Designer/Owner must receive “As-built” marked-up construction drawings and specificationsbefore the final pay request can be processed.
5. SUBMITTAL DATA
The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit all specified submittals to the Owner/Designer. A minimumnumber of copies as specified by the owner, of all required submittal data pertaining to construction, performanceand general dimensional criteria of the components listed in the technical specifications shall be submitted. Nomaterial or equipment shall be ordered or installed prior to written approval of the submittals by the Designer/Owner. Failure to provide submittal data for review on equipment listed in the technical specifications will result in removal ofequipment by the Contractor at his expense if the equipment is not in compliance with the specifications.
6. SUBSTITUTIONS
In accordance with the provisions of G.S. 133-3, material, product, or equipment substitutions proposed by thebidders to those specified herein can only be considered during the bidding phase until five (5) days prior to thereceipt of bids or by the date specified in the pre bid conference, when submitted to the Designer with sufficient data
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 5
to confirm material, product, or equipment equality. Proposed substitutions submitted after this time will beconsidered only as potential change order.
Submittals for proposed substitutions shall include the following information:
a. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer and supplier as appropriate.
b. Trade name, model or catalog designation.
c. Product data including performance and test data, reference standards, and technical descriptionsof material, product, or equipment. Include color samples and samples of available finishes asappropriate.
d. Detailed comparison with specified products including performance capabilities, warranties, and testresults.
e. Other pertinent data including data requested by the Designer to confirm product equality.
If a proposed material, product, or equipment substitution is deemed equal by the Designer to those specified, allbidders of record will be notified by Addendum.
7. WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE JOB SITE
The contractor shall maintain, in readable condition at his job site one complete set of working drawings andspecifications for his work including all shop drawings. Such drawings and specifications shall be available for useby the owner, designer or his authorized representative.
The contractor shall maintain at the job site, a day-to-day record of work-in-place that is at variance with the contractdocuments. Such variations shall be fully noted on project drawings by the contractor and submitted to the designerupon project completion and no later than 30 days after acceptance of the project.
8. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, EMPLOYEES
a. The contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, supply and pay for all labor, transportation, materials,tools, apparatus, lights, power, fuel, heat, sanitary facilities, water, scaffolding and incidentals necessaryfor the completion of his work, and shall install, maintain and remove all equipment of the construction,other utensils or things, and be responsible for the safe, proper and lawful construction, maintenanceand use of same, and shall construct in the best and most workmanlike manner, a complete job andeverything incidental thereto, as shown on the plans, stated in the specifications, or reasonably impliedtherefrom, all in accordance with the contract documents.
b. All materials shall be new and of quality specified, except where reclaimed material is authorized hereinand approved for use. Workmanship shall at all times be of a grade accepted as the best practice ofthe particular trade involved, and as stipulated in written standards of recognized organizations orinstitutes of the respective trades except as exceeded or qualified by the specifications.
c. Upon notice, the contractor shall furnish evidence as to quality of materials.
d. Products are generally specified by ASTM or other reference standard and/or by manufacturer's nameand model number or trade name. When specified only by reference standard, the Contractor mayselect any product meeting this standard, by any manufacturer. When several products ormanufacturers are specified as being equally acceptable, the Contractor has the option of using anyproduct and manufacturer combination listed. However, the contractor shall be aware that the citedexamples are used only to denote the quality standard of product desired and that they do not restrictbidders to a specific brand, make, manufacturer or specific name; that they are used only to set forthand convey to bidders the general style, type, character and quality of product desired; and thatequivalent products will be acceptable. Request for substitution of materials, items, or equipment shallbe submitted to the designer for approval or disapproval; the designer prior to the opening of bids shall
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 6
make such approval or disapproval. Alternate materials may be requested after the award if it canclearly be demonstrated that it is an added benefit to the owner and the designer and owner approves.
e. The designer is the judge of equality for proposed substitution of products, materials or equipment.
f. If at any time during the construction and completion of the work covered by these contract documents,the language, conduct, or attire of any workman of the various crafts be adjudged a nuisance to theowner or designer, or if any workman be considered detrimental to the work, the contractor shall ordersuch parties removed immediately from grounds.
g. The Contractor shall cooperate with the designer and the owner in coordinating construction activities.
h. The Contractor shall maintain qualified personnel and effective supervision at the site at all times duringthe project, and exercise the appropriate quality control program to ensure compliance with the projectdrawings and specifications. The designer is responsible for determining compliance with the drawingsand specifications.
9. CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
The Contractor shall obtain the required permits, if required, give all notices, and comply with all laws, ordinances,codes, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work under this contract. If the Contractor observes thatthe drawings and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Designer in writing. If theContractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, andwithout such notice to the Owner, he shall bear all cost arising there from.
All work under this contract shall conform to the current North Carolina Building Code and other state and nationalcodes as are applicable.
Projects constructed by the State of North Carolina or by any agency or institution of the State are not subject tocounty or municipal building codes and may* not be subject to inspection by county or municipal authorities. Whereappropriate, the Contractor shall, cooperate with the county or municipal authorities by obtaining building permits. The contractor at no cost may obtain permits to the owner.
All fire alarm work shall be in accordance with the latest State Construction Office (SCO) Guidelines for Fire AlarmInstallation (NFPA72). Where the contract documents are in conflict with the SCO guidelines, the SCO guidelinesshall govern. The Contractor shall be responsible for all the costs for the correction of the work where he installs itin conflict with the latest edition of the SCO Guidelines for Fire Alarm Installation..
10. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY, THE PUBLIC AND SAFETY
a. The contractors shall be jointly responsible for the entire site and the building or construction of thesame and provide all the necessary protections, as required by the owner or designer, and by laws orordinances governing such conditions. They shall be responsible for any damage to the owner'sproperty or of that of others on the job, by them, their personnel, or their subcontractors, and shall makegood such damages. They shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused to the owner. Allcontractors shall have access to the project at all times, except as indicated in the SupplementalGeneral Conditions.
b. The contractor shall provide cover and protect all portions of the structure when the work is not inprogress, provide and set all temporary roofs, covers for doorways, sash and windows, and all othermaterials necessary to protect all the work on the building, whether set by him, or any of the
*Inspection and certification of compliance by local authorities is necessary if an architect orengineer was not employed on the project, or if the plans and specifications were not approvedand the construction inspected by the State Construction Office.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 7
subcontractors. Any work damaged through the lack of proper protection or from any other cause, shallbe repaired or replaced without extra cost to the owner.
c. No fires of any kind will be allowed inside or around the operations during the course of constructionwithout special permission from the designer and owner.
d. The contractor shall protect all trees and shrubs designated to remain in the vicinity of the operations bybuilding substantial boxes around it. He shall barricade all walks, roads, etc., as directed by thedesigner to keep the public away from the construction. All trenches, excavations or other hazards inthe vicinity of the work shall be well barricaded and properly lighted at night.
e. The contractor shall provide all necessary safety measures for the protection of all persons on the job,including the requirements of the A.G.C. Accident Prevention Manual in Construction, as amended, andshall fully comply with all state laws or regulations and North Carolina State Building Code requirementsto prevent accident or injury to persons on or about the location of the work. He shall clearly mark orpost signs warning of hazards existing, and shall barricade excavations, elevator shafts, stairwells andsimilar hazards. He shall protect against damage or injury resulting from falling materials and he shallmaintain all protective devices and signs throughout the progress of the work.
f. The contractor shall adhere to the rules, regulations and interpretations of the North CarolinaDepartment of Labor relating to Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the Construction Industry(Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926, published in Volume 39, Number 122, Part II, June24, 1974, Federal Register), and revisions thereto as adopted by General Statutes of North Carolina95-126 through 155.
c. In the event of emergency affecting the safety of life, the protection of work, or the safety of adjoiningproperties, the contractor is hereby authorized to act at his own discretion, without further authorizationfrom anyone, to prevent such threatened injury or damage. Any compensation claimed by thecontractor on account of such action shall be determined as provided for under Article 13(b).
d. Any and all costs associated with correcting damage caused to adjacent properties of the constructionsite or staging area shall be borne by the contractor. These costs shall include but not be limited toflooding, mud, sand, stone, debris, and discharging of waste products.
11. SUBCONTRACTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS
The Contractor is and remains fully responsible for his own acts or omissions as well as those of any subcontractoror of any employee of either. The Contractor agrees that no contractual relationship exists between thesubcontractor and the Owner in regard to the contract, and that the subcontractor acts on this work as an agent oremployee of the Contractor.
12. CONTRACTOR-SUBCONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIPS
The Contractor agrees that the terms of these Contract Documents shall apply equally to each Subcontractor as tothe Contractor, and the Contractor agrees to take such action as may be necessary to bind each Subcontractor tothese terms. The Contractor further agrees to conform to the Code of Ethical Conduct as adopted by theAssociated General Contractors of America, Inc., with respect to Contractor-Subcontractor relationships. TheOwner reserves the right to limit the amount of portions of work to be subcontracted as hereinafter specified.
13. CHANGES IN THE WORK AND CLAMS FOR EXTRA COST
a. The owner may have changes made in the work covered by the contract. These changes will notinvalidate and will not relieve or release the contractor from any guarantee given by him pertinent tothe contract provisions. These changes will not affect the validity of the guarantee bond and will notrelieve the surety or sureties of said bond. All extra work shall be executed under conditions of theoriginal contract.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 8
b. Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change shall be made by the contractorexcept upon receipt of approved change order from the designer, countersigned by the ownerauthorizing such change. No claim for adjustments of the contract price shall be valid unless thisprocedure is followed. Should a claim for extra compensation by the contractor be denied by thedesigner or the owner, the contractor may pursue his claim in accordance with G.S. 143-135.3.
In the event of emergency endangering life or property, the contractor may be directed to proceedon a time and material basis whereupon the contractor shall proceed and keep accurately on suchform as specified by the designer or owner, a correct account of costs together with all properinvoices, payrolls and supporting data. Upon completion of the work the change order will beprepared as outlined under either Method "c(1)" or Method "c(2)" or both.
c. In determining the values of changes, either additive or deductive, contractors are restricted to theuse of the following methods:
1. Where the extra work involved is covered by unit prices quoted in the proposal, or subsequentlyagreed to by the Contractor, Designer, Owner and State Construction Office the value of thechange shall be computed by application of unit prices based on quantities, estimated or actualas agreed of the items involved, except is such cases where a quantity exceeds the estimatedquantity allowance in the contract by one hundred percent (100%) or more. In such cases,either party may elect to proceed under subparagraph c (2) herein. If neither party elects toproceed under c (2), then unit prices shall apply.
2. The contracting parties shall negotiate and agree upon the equitable value of the change priorto issuance of the change order, and the change order shall stipulate the corresponding lumpsum adjustment to the contract price.
d. Under Paragraph “b” and Methods "c(2)" above, the allowances for overhead and profit combinedshall be as follows: all contractors (the single contracting entity (prime), his subcontractors(1st tiersubs), or their sub-subcontractors (2nd tier subs, 3rd tier subs, etc.) shall be allowed a maximum of10% on work they each self-perform; the prime contractor shall be allowed a maximum of 5% oncontracted work of his 1st tier sub; 1st tier, 2nd tier, 3rd tier, etc. contractors shall be allowed amaximum of 2.5% on the contracted work of their subs. ; Under Method "c(1)", no additionalallowances shall be made for overhead and profit. In the case of deductible change orders, underMethod "c(2)" and Paragraph (b) above, the contractor shall include no less than five percent (5%)profit, but no allowances for overhead.
e. The term "net cost" as used herein shall mean the difference between all proper cost additions anddeductions. The "cost" as used herein shall be limited to the following:
1. The actual costs of materials and supplies incorporated or consumed as part of the work;
2. The actual costs of labor expended on the project site; labor expended in coordination, changeorder negotiation, record document maintenance, shop drawing revision or other tasksnecessary to the administration of the project are considered overhead whether they take placein an office or on the project site.
3. The actual costs of labor burden, limited to the costs of social security (FICA) and Medicare/Medicaid taxes; unemployment insurance costs; health/dental/vision insurancepremiums; paid employee leave for holidays, vacation, sick leave, and/or petty leave, not toexceed a total of 30 days per year; retirement contributions; worker’s compensation insurancepremiums; and the costs of general liability insurance when premiums are computed based onpayroll amounts; the total of which shall not exceed thirty percent (30%) of the actual costs of labor;
4. The actual costs of rental for tools, excluding hand tools; equipment; machinery; and temporary facilities required for the work;
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 9
5. The actual costs of premiums for bonds, insurance, permit fees and sales or use taxes relatedto the work.
Overtime and extra pay for holidays and weekends may be a cost item only to the extent approvedby the owner.
f. Should concealed conditions be encountered in the performance of the work below grade, or shouldconcealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditionsindicated by the contract documents, the contract sum and time for completion may be equitablyadjusted by change order upon claim by either party made within thirty (30) days after the conditionhas been identified. The cost of such change shall be arrived at by one of the foregoing methods. All change orders shall be supported by a unit cost breakdown showing method of arriving at netcost as defined above.
g. Change orders shall be submitted by the contractor in writing to the owner/designer for review andapproval. The contractor will provide such proposal and supporting data in suitable format. Thedesigner shall verify correctness. Delay in the processing of the change order due to lack of propersubmittal by the contractor of all required supporting data shall not constitute grounds for a timeextension or basis of a claim. Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of the contractor’s acceptedproposal including all supporting documentation required by the designer, the designer shallprepare the change order and forward to the contractor for his signature or otherwise respond, inwriting, to the contractor’s proposal. Within seven (7) days after receipt of the change orderexecuted by the contractor, the designer shall, certify the change order by his signature, andforward the change order and all supporting data to the owner for the owner's signature. The ownershall execute the change order, within seven (7) days of receipt.
At the time of signing a change order, the contractor shall be required to certify as follows:
"I certify that my bonding company will be notified forthwith that my contract has been changed bythe amount of this change order, and that a copy of the approved change order will be mailed uponreceipt by me to my surety."
h. A change order, when issued, shall be full compensation, or credit, for the work included, omitted orsubstituted. It shall show on its face the adjustment in time for completion of the project as a resultof the change in the work.
i. If, during the progress of the work, the owner requests a change order and the contractor's termsare unacceptable, the owner, may require the contractor to perform such work on a time andmaterial basis whereupon the contractor shall proceed and keep accurately on such form asspecified by the Designer or owner, a correct account of cost together with all proper invoices,payrolls and supporting data. Upon completion of the work a change order will be prepared withallowances for overhead and profit per paragraph d. above and “net cost” and “cost” per paragraphe. above. Without prejudice, nothing in this paragraph shall preclude the owner from performing orto have performed that portion of the work requested in the change order.
14. ANNULMENT OF CONTRACT
If the contractor fails to begin the work under the contract within the time specified, or the progress of the work is notmaintained on schedule, or the work is not completed within the time specified, or fails to perform the work withsufficient workmen and equipment or with sufficient materials to ensure the prompt completion of said work, or shallperform the work unsuitably or shall discontinue the prosecution of the work, or if the contractor shall becomeinsolvent or be declared bankrupt or commit any act of bankruptcy or insolvency, or allow any final judgment tostand against him unsatisfied for a period of forty-eight (48) hours, or shall make an assignment for the benefit ofcreditors, or for any other cause whatsoever shall not carry on the work in an acceptable manner, the owner maygive notice in writing, sent by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the contractor and his surety (if applicable)of such delay, neglect or default, specifying the same, and if the contractor within a period of seven (7) days aftersuch notice shall not proceed in accordance therewith, then the owner shall, declare this contract in default, and,thereupon, the surety shall promptly take over the work and complete the performance of this contract in the mannerand within the time frame specified. In the event the contractor, or the surety (if applicable) shall fail to take over the
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 10
work to be done under this contract within seven (7) days after being so notified and notify the owner in writing, sentby certified mail, return receipt requested, that he is taking the same over and stating that he will diligently pursueand complete the same, the owner shall have full power and authority, without violating the contract, to take theprosecution of the work out of the hands of said contractor, to appropriate or use any or all contract materials andequipment on the grounds as may be suitable and acceptable and may enter into an agreement, either by publicletting or negotiation, for the completion of said contract according to the terms and provisions thereof or use suchother methods as in his opinion shall be required for the completion of said contract in an acceptable manner. Allcosts and charges incurred by the owner, together with the costs of completing the work under contract, shall bededucted from any monies due or which may become due said contractor and surety (if applicable). In case theexpense so incurred by the owner shall be less than the sum which would have been payable under the contract, ifit had been completed by said contractor, then the said contractor and surety (if applicable) shall be entitled toreceive the difference, but in case such expense shall exceed the sum which would have been payable under thecontract, then the contractor and the surety (if applicable) shall be liable and shall pay to the owner the amount ofsaid excess.
15. TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE
a. Owner may at any time and for any reason terminate Contractor’s services and work at Owner'sconvenience, after notification to the contractor in writing via certified mail. Upon receipt of suchnotice, Contractor shall, unless the notice directs otherwise, immediately discontinue the work andplacing of orders for materials, facilities and supplies in connection with the performance of thisAgreement.
b. Upon such termination, Contractor shall be entitled to payment only as follows: (1) the actual cost ofthe work completed in conformity with this Agreement; plus, (2) such other costs actually incurredby Contractor as approved by Owner; (3) plus ten percent (10%) of the cost of the balance of thework to be completed for overhead and profit. There shall be deducted from such sums as providedin this subparagraph the amount of any payments made to Contractor prior to the date of thetermination of this Agreement. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim or claim of lien againstOwner for any additional compensation or damages in the event of such termination and payment.
16. OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK
If, during the progress of the work or during the period of guarantee, the contractor fails to prosecute the workproperly or to perform any provision of the contract, the owner, after seven (7) days' written notice sent by certifiedmail, return receipt requested, to the contractor from the designer, may perform or have performed that portion ofthe work. The cost of the work may be deducted from any amounts due or to become due to the contractor, suchaction and cost of same having been first approved by the designer. Should the cost of such action of the ownerexceed the amount due or to become due the contractor, then the contractor or his surety, or both, shall be liable forand shall pay to the owner the amount of said excess.
17. REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT
Contractor shall refer to the Supplemental General Conditions for specific directions on payment schedule,procedures and the name and address where to send applications for payments for this project. It is imperative thatinvoices be sent only to the above address in order to assure proper and timely delivery and handling.
The Designer/Owner will process all Contractor pay requests as the project progresses. The Contractor shallreceive payment within thirty (30) consecutive days after Designer/Owner’s approval of each pay request. Paymentwill only be made for work performed as determined by the Designer/Owner.
Retainage:a. Retainage withheld will not exceed 5% at any time.b. The same terms apply to general contractor and subcontractors alike.c. Following 50% completion of the project no further retainage will be withheld if the
contractor/subcontractor has performed their work satisfactorily.State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 11
d. Exceptions:1. Owner/Contractor can reinstate retainage if the contractor/subcontractor does not continue
to perform satisfactorily.2. Following 50% completion of the project, the owner is authorized to withhold additional
retainage from a subsequent periodic payment if the amount of retainage withheld fallsbelow 2.5%.
Final payment will be made within forty-five (45) consecutive days after acceptance of the work, receipt of marked-up “as-built” drawings and specifications and the submission both of notarized Contractor's affidavit and final payrequest. All pay requests shall be submitted to the Designer/Owner for approval.
THE CONTRACTOR'S FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT SHALL STATE: "THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT ALL COSTS OF MATERIALS,EQUIPMENT, LABOR, SUBCONTRACTED WORK, AND ALL ELSE ENTERING INTO THE ACCOMPLISHMENT OF THIS CONTRACT,INCLUDING PAYROLLS, HAVE BEEN PAID IN FULL."
18. PAYMENTS WITHHELD
The designer with the approval of the Owner may withhold payment for the following reasons:
a. Faulty work not corrected.
b. The unpaid balance on the contract is insufficient to complete the work in the judgment of thedesigner.
c. To provide for sufficient contract balance to cover liquidated damages that will be assessed.
d. The secretary of the Department of Administration may authorize the withholding of payment for thefollowing reasons:
i. Claims filed against the contractor or evidence that a claim will be filed.
ii. Evidence that subcontractors have not been paid.
When grounds for withholding payments have been removed, payment will be released. Delay of payment due thecontractor without cause will make owner liable for payment of interest to the contractor as provided in G.S.143-134.1. As provided in G.S. 143-134.1(e), the owner shall not be liable for interest on payments withheld by theowner for unsatisfactory job progress, defective construction not remedied, disputed work, or third-party claims filedagainst the owner or reasonable evidence that a third-party claim will be filed.
19. MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The work under this contract shall not commence until the contractor has obtained all required insurance andverifying certificates of insurance have been approved in writing by the owner. These certificates shall documentthat coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled, reduced in amount or coverages eliminated until atleast thirty (30) days after mailing written notice, by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the insured and theowner of such alteration or cancellation. If endorsements are needed to comply with the notification or otherrequirements of this article copies of the endorsements shall be submitted with the certificates.
a. Worker’s Compensation and Employer's Liability
The contractor shall provide and maintain, until final acceptance, workmen's compensationinsurance, as required by law, as well as employer's liability coverage with minimum limits of$100,000.
b. Public Liability and Property DamageState of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 12
The contractor shall provide and maintain, until final acceptance, comprehensive general liabilityinsurance, including coverage for premises operations, independent contractors, completedoperations, products and contractual exposures, as shall protect such contractors from claimsarising out of any bodily injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims for propertydamages which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by thecontractor or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of themand the minimum limits of such insurance shall be as follows:
Bodily Injury: $500,000 per occurrenceProperty Damage: $100,000 per occurrence / $300,000 aggregate
In lieu of limits listed above, a $500,000 combined single limit shall satisfy both conditions.
Such coverage for completed operations must be maintained for at least two (2) years followingfinal acceptance of the work performed under the contract.
c. Property Insurance (Builder’s Risk/Installation Floater)
The contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance until final acceptance, upon theentire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests ofthe owner, the contractor, the subcontractors and sub-subcontractors in the work and shall insureagainst the perils of fire, wind, rain, flood, extended coverage, and vandalism and maliciousmischief. If the owner is damaged by failure of the contractor to purchase or maintain suchinsurance, then the contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto; thecontractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the work stored off thesite when request for payment per articles so includes such portions.
d. Deductible
Any deductible, if applicable to loss covered by insurance provided, is to be borne by the contractor.
e. Other Insurance
The contractor shall obtain such additional insurance as may be required by the owner or by theGeneral Statutes of North Carolina including motor vehicle insurance, in amounts not less than thestatutory limits.
f. Proof of Carriage
The contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of carriage of the insurance requiredbefore written approval is granted by the owner.
20. ASSIGNMENT
No assignment of the Contractor's obligations or the Contractor's right to receive payment hereunder shall bepermitted. However, upon written request approved by the Owner and solely as a convenience to the Contractor,the Owner may: (1) forward the Contractor's payment check directly to any person or entity designated by theContractor, and (2) include any person or entity designated by Contractor as a joint payee on the Contractor'spayment check. In no event shall such approval and action obligate the Owner to anyone other than theContractor, and the Contractor shall remain responsible for fulfillment of all contract obligations.
21. CLEANING UP AND RESTORATION OF SITE
The Contractor shall keep the sites and surrounding area reasonably free from rubbish at all times and shall removedebris from the site from time to time or when directed to do so by the Owner. Before final inspection andacceptance of the project, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the sites, and completely prepare the project andsite for use by the Owner.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 13
At the end of construction, the contractor shall oversee and implement the restoration of the construction site to itsoriginal state. Restoration includes but not limited to walks, drives, lawns, trees and shrubs, corridors, stairs andother elements shall be repaired, cleaned or otherwise restored to their original state.
22. GUARANTEE
The contractor shall unconditionally guarantee materials and workmanship against patent defects arising from faultymaterials, faulty workmanship or negligence for a period of twelve (12) months following the final acceptance of thework and shall replace such defective materials or workmanship without cost to the owner.
Where items of equipment or material carry a manufacturer's warranty for any period in excess of twelve (12)months, then the manufacturer's warranty shall apply for that particular piece of equipment or material. Thecontractor shall replace such defective equipment or materials, without cost to the owner, within the manufacturer'swarranty period.
Additionally, the owner may bring an action for latent defects caused by the negligence of the contractor, which ishidden or not readily apparent to the owner at the time of beneficial occupancy or final acceptance, whicheveroccurred first, in accordance with applicable law.
Guarantees for roofing workmanship and materials shall be stipulated in the specifications sections governing suchroof, equipment, materials, or supplies.
23. STANDARDS
All manufactured items and/or fabricated assemblies subject to operation under pressure, operation by connectionto an electric source, or operation involving a connection to a manufactured, natural, or LP gas source shall beconstructed and approved in a manner acceptable to the appropriate State inspector which customarily requires thelabel or re-examination listing or identification marking of appropriate safety standard organization, such as theAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers for pressure vessels; the Underwriters Laboratories and/or NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association for electrically operated assemblies; or the American Gas Association for gasoperated assemblies, where such approvals of listings have been established for the type of device offered andfurnished. Further, all items furnished shall meet all requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA), and State and federal requirements relating to clean air and water pollution.
All equipment and products must be independent third party tested and labeled (UL, FM, or CTS) before finalconnections to Owner services or utilities.
24. TAXES
a. Federal excise taxes do not apply to materials entering into state work (Internal Revenue Code,Section 3442(3)).
b. Federal transportation taxes do not apply to materials entering into state work (Internal RevenueCode, Section 3475(b) as amended).
c. North Carolina sales tax and use tax, as required by law, do apply to materials entering into statework and such costs shall be included in the bid proposal and contract sum.
d. Local option sales and use taxes, as required by law, do apply to materials entering into state workas applicable and such costs shall be included in the bid proposal and contract sum.
e. Accounting Procedures for Refund of County Sales & Use Tax
Amount of county sales and use tax paid per contractor's statements:
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 14
Contractors performing contracts for state agencies shall give the state agency for whose projectthe property was purchased a signed statement containing the information listed in G.S. 105-164.14(e).
The Department of Revenue has agreed that in lieu of obtaining copies of sales receipts fromcontractors, an agency may obtain a certified statement as of April 1, 1991 from the contractorsetting forth the date, the type of property and the cost of the property purchased from each vendor,the county in which the vendor made the sale and the amount of local sales and use taxes paidthereon. If the property was purchased out-of-state, the county in which the property was deliveredshould be listed. The contractor should also be notified that the certified statement may be subjectto audit.
In the event the contractors make several purchases from the same vendor, such certifiedstatement must indicate the invoice numbers, the inclusive dates of the invoices, the total amount ofthe invoices, the counties, and the county sales and use taxes paid thereon.
Name of taxing county: The position of a sale is the retailer's place of business located within ataxing county where the vendor becomes contractually obligated to make the sale. Therefore, it isimportant that the county tax be reported for the county of sale rather than the county of use.
When property is purchased from out-of-state vendors and the county tax is charged, the countyshould be identified where delivery is made when reporting the county tax.
Such statement must also include the cost of any tangible personal property withdrawn from thecontractor's warehouse stock and the amount of county sales or use tax paid thereon by thecontractor.
Similar certified statements by his subcontractors must be obtained by the general contractor andfurnished to the claimant.
Contractors are not to include any tax paid on supplies, tools and equipment which they use toperform their contracts and should include only those building materials, supplies, fixtures andequipment which actually become a part of or annexed to the building or structure.
25. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE
The non-discrimination clause contained in Section 202 (Federal) Executive Order 11246, as amended by ExecutiveOrder 11375, relative to equal employment opportunity for all persons without regard to race, color, religion, sex ornational origin, and the implementing rules and regulations prescribed by the secretary of Labor, are incorporatedherein.
The contractor(s) agree not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of physicalor mental disabilities in regard to any position for which the employee or applicant is qualified. The contractoragrees to take affirmative action to employ, advance in employment and otherwise treat qualified individuals withsuch disabilities without discrimination based upon their physical or mental disability in all employment practices.
26. MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION
GS 143-128.2 establishes a ten percent (10%) goal for participation by minority business in total value of work foreach State building project.
For construction contracts with a value of less than $300,000, the Owner has the responsibility to make a good faitheffort to solicit minority bids and to attain the goal. The contractor shall include with his bid a completed Identificationof HUB Certified/Minority Business Participation form. Contractor shall submit completed Appendix E MBEDocumentation for Contract Payments form with final payment request.
For construction contracts with a value of $300,000 or greater, the contractor shall comply with the documentGuidelines for Recruitment and Selection of Minority Businesses for Participation in State Construction Contracts
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 15
including Identification of Minority Business Participation, Affidavits A, B, C, and D, and Appendix E. These formsprovided herein are hereby incorporated and made a part of this contract.
27. ACCESS TO PERSONS AND RECORDS
The State Auditor shall have access to persons and records as a result of all contracts or grants entered into by theOwner in accordance with General Statute 147-64.7. The Owner’s internal auditors shall also have the right toaccess and copy the Contractor’s records relating to the Contract and Project during the term of the Contract andwithin two years following the completion of the Project/close-out of the Contract to verify accounts, accuracy,information, calculations and/or data affecting and/or relating to Contractor’s requests for payment, requests forchange orders, change orders, claims for extra work, requests for time extensions and related claims fordelay/extended general conditions costs, claims for lost productivity, claims for lost efficiency, claims for idleequipment or labor, claims for price/cost escalation, pass-through claims of subcontractors and/or suppliers, and/orany other type of claim for payment or damages from Owner and/or its project representatives.
28. GOVERNING LAWS
This contract is made under and shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State ofNorth Carolina. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, State and local laws, statutes, ordinancesand regulations including, but not limited to, the Omnibus Transportation Act of 1991 and its implementingregulations.
29. CONTRACTOR EVALUATION
The contractor’s overall work performance on the project shall be fairly evaluated in accordance with the StateBuilding Commission policy and procedures, for determining qualifications to bid on future State projects. Inaddition to final evaluation, an interim evaluation may be prepared during the progress of project. The owner mayrequest the contractor’s comments to evaluate the designer.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 16
UNCG
S U P P L E M E N T A R Y G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S
1. GENERAL
The Supplementary General Conditions are to supplement, or amend the “General Conditions of the Contract” and
intended to address job specific issues.
2. TIME OF COMPLETION
Project to be substantially complete by December 31, 2016.
3. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
All permitting, submittals, field verifications and measurements, shop drawings, material orders, and other pre-construction work shall be completed prior to October 29, 2016.
4. SUBSTITUTIONS
Any request for substitution from specified products/manufacturers must be submitted to the Architect for review noless than 15 days prior to the receipt of bids. Contractors are not to assume acceptability of proposed substitutionsunless added via Addendum.
5. PAYMENTS
No payment will be made for stored materials which are stored off-site. Payment Requests shall use Form AIAG702, fully completed and executed, submitted in six duplicate copies, including attachment of waivers, statement ofpurchased property and associated sales tax similar documentation with one copy. The Contractor shall allow 10working days for the Engineer's review and approval of cost estimates and ten days for the Owner's review,approval and payment.
Executed contract documents, insurance certifications and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, invoicesand other information requested are to be sent to:
Scott Noble
Facilities Design and Construction
UNC Greensboro
105 Gray Drive
Greensboro, NC 27412
Ph: (336) 334-5269 Fax: (336) 334-3212
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 17
6. SALES TAX REPORTING
With each Application for Payment submitted, Contractors must provide a statement of materials purchased forand/or used in the University project. Included shall be the purchase date, type of property, University project name,North Carolina County of purchase, cost of property and county sales and use tax paid. Forms shall include theperiod of time covered and shall be signed and dated. You may use the form entitled "UNCG Contractor Statementof Property Purchased", or a comparable one, so long as all information listed above is provided. This form isavailable for download from the “Resources” section of the FDC website.
Only those building materials, supplies, fixtures and equipment which actually become part of the building orstructure are to be included on this form. The statement must also include the cost of any tangible personal propertywithdrawn from the Contractor's warehouse stock and the amount of county sales or use tax paid thereon by theContractor. Similar statements by subcontractors must be obtained by the General Contractor and furnished to theUniversity. In the event that several purchases are made from the same vendor, the certified statement mustindicate invoice numbers. This statement of property and county tax paid is required by General Statute 105-164.14(e).
The statement SHALL NOT INCLUDE tax paid on supplies, tools and equipment used to perform contracts.
If no taxable materials have been used during the period, submit a form stating "No Taxable Materials This Period".Give all other information regarding project name and period covered and sign and date the form.
7. UTILITIES
Owner will provide certain utilities such as power and water with connections and extensions by the Contractor. TheOwner, at his discretion, will designate existing toilet facilities for use by the workmen on the site. GeneralContractor shall remove all temporary utilities and facilities at the end of the construction period (or earlier, with theArchitect’s approval).
1. Any necessary shutdowns of electrical or other utilities must be approved at least 48 hours in advance withUNCG FDC at (336) 334-5269 and the University's Facilities Operations personnel. It is imperative thatadjacent utilities and other existing services be maintained at all times except for scheduled interruptions.
2. The University's personnel will perform certain functions in connection with utility outages, such as operatingelectrical switches, operating water valves, etc. The Owner will bear these expenses; however, whencontractor requires extra outages because of shortage of material, improper material, shortage of labor,poor coordination, etc., the contractor shall pay the Owner all expenses incurred in the use of the Universitypersonnel for the extra outages. It is imperative that campus utilities and other campus services bemaintained at all times except for scheduled interruptions.
3. Removal of Temporary Utilities and Facilities: General Contractor shall remove all temporary utilities andfacilities at the end of the construction period, earlier with the Architect's approval. Designer shouldcoordinate with the Design Project Manager.
8. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Designer will attend all monthly construction progress meetings and will record the minutes of each meetingand distribute to all attendees within 3 working days. The Designer and appropriate sub-consultants will also attendall weekly meetings with the General Contractor providing the meeting minutes. Designer to check as-built drawingsat monthly meetings.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 18
9. SITE SECURITY
The Owner will supply only the security measures required for University operations. The contractor shall providethe necessary security means to protect his work, materials, tools, and construction equipment from vandalism,theft, and fire. Security services shall be supplied by the contractor as he deems necessary. Any security service setup by the contractor shall be approved by the Owner. The contractor shall be responsible for replacement of his/hermaterials, machinery, equipment, tools and supplies due to theft.
10. USE OF SITE
1. Storage/Laydown/Staging Area: Refer to the drawings for approved construction staging and storage areas.
2. Construction Parking: Parking is extremely limited at UNCG. Refer to Section 15000 for additional requirements.
11. ALTERNATE BIDS
1. Alternate #1 (add or deduct):
Provide the cost to specifically furnish Sneider Electric for the DDC automation control system inthe area of renovation, the system currently in place in this building.
12. UNIT PRICES
None this project.
13. WORKING HOURS
On-Site Work Hours Restrictions: Work shall be generally performed during normal business working hours of 7:00a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Some facilities on campus have extended operating hours outside thestandard restrictions. Coordinate any work prior to, or after normal business hours with the University’sConstruction Project Manager.
1. Weekend Hours: with owner approval, provide 72 hour advanced notice.
2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with the University and the City of Greensboro to minimize impacton the project building and or surrounding buildings/businesses (as applicable).
3. The contractor may establish a working schedule of his own choosing for the portions of constructioninvolved in the project that do not require interruptions of utility services (electric, water, steam, etc.) tocampus facilities. The contractor shall submit to UNCG and to the designer his regular daily work schedule,and shall notify the University Project Manager in advance of any deviations from the schedule. TheUniversity reserves the right to limit the contractor's activities when they conflict with University operations.The Owner will solely approve the scheduling of all interruptions of utilities to campus facilities.
UNCG provides an academic calendar on its web page (http://reg.uncg.edu/calendars/) listing special events thatwill occur on campus during the construction period of this contract. The contractor shall restrict his operations, asrequired and outlined below, on these days. Consult with the University’s Construction Project Manager to confirm ifthese restricted days apply.
1. During examination periods, generally occurring in May and December for six (6) days each, and June andJuly for two (2) days each.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 19
2. Graduation, generally in mid-May and mid-December.
3. Student move-in/out days, generally twice a year for one (1) week each.
Work will not be permitted on Graduation Day, nor the day preceding it. Extra cleanup, warning signs, andbarricades will be provided by the contractor during these days.
Work is normally permitted on days of sporting events, but traffic is extremely heavy on these days, and
Contractors may have difficulty and experience delays getting to and from the job site.
Work is normally permitted on student move-in/out days but traffic is heavier than normal, parking is restricted, andsome campus roads are temporarily closed or designated one-way
ARTICLE 14. NO SMOKING POLICY
Smoking is prohibited inside, and within twenty-five (25) feet of any building.
ARTICLE 15. CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION
The contractor will employ processes that reduce waste generation to the greatest extent possible due to errors,poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. Of the non-hazardous construction wastethat is generated, a minimum of 75% by weight should be reused, salvaged, or recycled. Waste disposal in landfillsshould be minimized. Document the disposal/disposition of waste materials and provide to the Owner, prior to orwith each application for payment, waste, salvaged and recycled material manifests.
ARTICLE 16. FIRE ALARM WORK
Contractor for fire alarms shall be approved by Facilities Design and Construction prior to beginning work.
ARTICLE 17. MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION
Refer to the “GUIDELINES FOR RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION OF MINORITY BUSINESSES FORPARTICIPATION IN UNIVERSITY OF NORTH CAROLINA CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS”.
State of North Carolina Standard Form of Informal Contract and General Conditions 20
MBGuidelines 2002 - i-
GUIDELINES FOR RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION OF MINORITY BUSINESSES FOR PARTICIPATION IN STATE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
In accordance with G.S. 143-128.2 (effective January 1, 2002) these guidelines establish goals for minority participation in single-prime bidding, separate-prime bidding, construction manager at risk, and alternative contracting methods, on State construction projects in the amount of $300,000 or more. The legislation provides that the State shall have a verifiable ten percent (10%) goal for participation by minority businesses in the total value of work for each project for which a contract or contracts are awarded. These requirements are published to accomplish that end. SECTION A: INTENT It is the intent of these guidelines that the State of North Carolina, as awarding authority for construction projects, and the contractors and subcontractors performing the construction contracts awarded shall cooperate and in good faith do all things legal, proper and reasonable to achieve the statutory goal of ten percent (10%) for participation by minority businesses in each construction project as mandated by GS 143-128.2. Nothing in these guidelines shall be construed to require contractors or awarding authorities to award contracts or subcontracts to or to make purchases of materials or equipment from minority-business contractors or minority-business subcontractors who do not submit the lowest responsible, responsive bid or bids. SECTION B: DEFINITIONS
1. Minority - a person who is a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United States and who is: a. Black, that is, a person having origins in any of the black racial groups in Africa; b. Hispanic, that is, a person of Spanish or Portuguese culture with origins in Mexico, South or
Central America, or the Caribbean Islands, regardless of race; c. Asian American, that is, a person having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far
East, Southeast Asia and Asia, the Indian subcontinent, the Pacific Islands; d. American Indian, that is, a person having origins in any of the original peoples of North
America; or e. Female
2. Minority Business - means a business:
a. In which at least fifty-one percent (51%) is owned by one or more minority persons, or in the case of a corporation, in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock is owned by one or more minority persons or socially and economically disadvantaged individuals; and
b. Of which the management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more of the minority persons or socially and economically disadvantaged individuals who own it.
3. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual - means the same as defined in 15 U.S.C.
637. “Socially disadvantaged individuals are those who have been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because of their identity as a member of a group without regard to their individual qualities”. “Economically disadvantaged individuals are those socially disadvantaged individuals whose ability to compete in the free enterprise system has been impaired due to diminished capital and credit opportunities as compared to others in the same business area who are not socially disadvantaged”.
4. Public Entity - means State and all public subdivisions and local governmental units.
5. Owner - The State of North Carolina, through the Agency/Institution named in the contract.
6. Designer – Any person, firm, partnership, or corporation, which has contracted with the State of
North Carolina to perform architectural or engineering, work.
7. Bidder - Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture seeking to be awarded a public contract or subcontract.
MBGuidelines 2002 - ii-
8. Contract - A mutually binding legal relationship or any modification thereof obligating the seller to furnish equipment, materials or services, including construction, and obligating the buyer to pay for them.
9. Contractor - Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture which has
contracted with the State of North Carolina to perform construction work or repair.
10. Subcontractor - A firm under contract with the prime contractor or construction manager at risk for supplying materials or labor and materials and/or installation. The subcontractor may or may not provide materials in his subcontract.
SECTION C: RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Office for Historically Underutilized Businesses, Department of Administration (hereinafter referred
to as HUB Office). The HUB Office has established a program, which allows interested persons or businesses qualifying as a minority business under G.S. 143-128.2, to obtain certification in the State of North Carolina procurement system. The information provided by the minority businesses will be used by the HUB Office to:
a. Identify those areas of work for which there are minority businesses, as requested. b. Make available to interested parties a list of prospective minority business contractors and
subcontractors. c. Assist in the determination of technical assistance needed by minority business contractors.
In addition to being responsible for the certification/verification of minority businesses that want to participate in the State construction program, the HUB Office will:
(1) Maintain a current list of minority businesses. The list shall include the areas of work in which each minority business is interested.
(2) Inform minority businesses on how to identify and obtain contracting and subcontracting opportunities through the State Construction Office and other public entities.
(3) Inform minority businesses of the contracting and subcontracting process for public construction building projects.
(4) Work with the North Carolina trade and professional organizations to improve the ability of minority businesses to compete in the State construction projects.
(5) The HUB Office also oversees the minority business program by: a. Monitoring compliance with the program requirements. b. Assisting in the implementation of training and technical assistance programs. c. Identifying and implementing outreach efforts to increase the utilization of minority
businesses. d. Reporting the results of minority business utilization to the Secretary of the
Department of Administration, the Governor, and the General Assembly. 2. State Construction Office
The State Construction Office will be responsible for the following: a. Furnish to the HUB Office a minimum of twenty-one days prior to the bid opening the following:
(1) Project description and location; (2) Locations where bidding documents may be reviewed; (3) Name of a representative of the owner who can be contacted during the advertising
period to advise who the prospective bidders are; (4) Date, time and location of the bid opening. (5) Date, time and location of prebid conference, if scheduled.
b. Attending scheduled prebid conference, if necessary, to clarify requirements of the general
statutes regarding minority-business participation, including the bidders' responsibilities.
MBGuidelines 2002 - iii-
c. Reviewing the apparent low bidders' statutory compliance with the requirements listed in the proposal, that must be complied with, if the bid is to be considered as responsive, prior to award of contracts. The State reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
d. Reviewing of minority business requirements at Preconstruction conference. e. Monitoring of contractors’ compliance with minority business requirements in the contract
documents during construction. f. Provide statistical data and required reports to the HUB Office. g. Resolve any protest and disputes arising after implementation of the plan, in conjunction with the
HUB Office. 3. Owner
Before awarding a contract, owner shall do the following: a. Develop and implement a minority business participation outreach plan to identify minority
businesses that can perform public building projects and to implement outreach efforts to encourage minority business participation in these projects to include education, recruitment, and interaction between minority businesses and non-minority businesses.
b. Attend the scheduled prebid conference. c. At least 10 days prior to the scheduled day of bid opening, notify minority businesses that have
requested notices from the public entity for public construction or repair work and minority businesses that otherwise indicated to the Office for Historically Underutilized Businesses an interest in the type of work being bid or the potential contracting opportunities listed in the proposal. The notification shall include the following:
1. A description of the work for which the bid is being solicited. 2. The date, time, and location where bids are to be submitted. 3. The name of the individual within the owner’s organization who will be available to
answer questions about the project. 4. Where bid documents may be reviewed. 5. Any special requirements that may exist.
d. Utilize other media, as appropriate, likely to inform potential minority businesses of the bid being sought.
e. Maintain documentation of any contacts, correspondence, or conversation with minority business firms made in an attempt to meet the goals.
f. Review, jointly with the designer, all requirements of G.S. 143-128.2(c) and G.S. 143-128.2(f) – (i.e. bidders’ proposals for identification of the minority businesses that will be utilized with corresponding total dollar value of the bid and affidavit listing good faith efforts, or affidavit of self-performance of work, if the contractor will perform work under contract by its own workforce) - prior to recommendation of award to the State Construction Office.
g. Evaluate documentation to determine good faith effort has been achieved for minority business utilization prior to recommendation of award to State Construction Office.
h. Review prime contractors’ pay applications for compliance with minority business utilization commitments prior to payment.
i. Make documentation showing evidence of implementation of Owner’s responsibilities available for review by State Construction Office and HUB Office, upon request
4. Designer
Under the single-prime bidding, separate prime bidding, construction manager at risk, or alternative contracting method, the designer will: a. Attend the scheduled prebid conference to explain minority business requirements to the
prospective bidders. b. Assist the owner to identify and notify prospective minority business prime and subcontractors
of potential contracting opportunities. c. Maintain documentation of any contacts, correspondence, or conversation with minority business
firms made in an attempt to meet the goals. d. Review jointly with the owner, all requirements of G.S. 143-128.2(c) and G.S.143-128.2(f) –
(i.e. bidders’ proposals for identification of the minority businesses that will be utilized with
MBGuidelines 2002 - iv-
corresponding total dollar value of the bid and affidavit listing Good Faith Efforts, or affidavit of self-performance of work, if the contractor will perform work under contract by its own workforce) - prior to recommendation of award.
e. During construction phase of the project, review “MBE Documentation for Contract Payment” – (Appendix E) for compliance with minority business utilization commitments. Submit Appendix E form with monthly pay applications to the owner and forward copies to the State Construction Office.
f. Make documentation showing evidence of implementation of Designer’s responsibilities available for review by State Construction Office and HUB Office, upon request.
5. Prime Contractor(s), CM at Risk, and Its First-Tier Subcontractors Under the single-prime bidding, the separate-prime biding, construction manager at risk and
alternative contracting methods, contractor(s) will:
a. Attend the scheduled prebid conference. b. Identify or determine those work areas of a subcontract where minority businesses may have an
interest in performing subcontract work. c. At least ten (10) days prior to the scheduled day of bid opening, notify minority businesses of
potential subcontracting opportunities listed in the proposal. The notification will include the following: (1) A description of the work for which the subbid is being solicited. (2) The date, time and location where subbids are to be submitted. (3) The name of the individual within the company who will be available to answer questions
about the project. (4) Where bid documents may be reviewed. (5) Any special requirements that may exist, such as insurance, licenses, bonds and financial
arrangements. If there are more than three (3) minority businesses in the general locality of the project who offer similar contracting or subcontracting services in the specific trade, the contractor(s) shall notify three (3), but may contact more, if the contractor(s) so desires.
d. During the bidding process, comply with the contractor(s) requirements listed in the proposal for minority participation.
e. Identify on the bid, the minority businesses that will be utilized on the project with corresponding total dollar value of the bid and affidavit listing good faith efforts as required by G.S. 143-128.2(c) and G.S. 143-128.2(f).
f. Make documentation showing evidence of implementation of PM, CM-at-Risk and First-Tier Subcontractor responsibilities available for review by State Construction Office and HUB Office, upon request.
g. Upon being named the apparent low bidder, the Bidder shall provide one of the following: (1) an affidavit (Affidavit C) that includes a description of the portion of work to be executed by minority businesses, expressed as a percentage of the total contract price, which is equal to or more than the applicable goal; (2) if the percentage is not equal to the applicable goal, then documentation of all good faith efforts taken to meet the goal. Failure to comply with these requirements is grounds for rejection of the bid and award to the next lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
h. The contractor(s) shall identify the name(s) of minority business subcontractor(s) and corresponding dollar amount of work on the schedule of values. The schedule of values shall be provided as required in Article 31 of the General Conditions of the Contract to facilitate payments to the subcontractors.
i. The contractor(s) shall submit with each monthly pay request(s) and final payment(s), “MBE Documentation for Contract Payment” – (Appendix E), for designer’s review.
j. During the construction of a project, at any time, if it becomes necessary to replace a minority business subcontractor, immediately advise the owner, State Construction Office, and the Director of the HUB Office in writing, of the circumstances involved. The prime contractor shall make a good faith effort to replace a minority business subcontractor with another minority business subcontractor.
MBGuidelines 2002 - v-
k. If during the construction of a project additional subcontracting opportunities become available, make a good faith effort to solicit subbids from minority businesses.
l. It is the intent of these requirements apply to all contractors performing as prime contractor and first tier subcontractor under construction manager at risk on state projects.
6. Minority Business Responsibilities
While minority businesses are not required to become certified in order to participate in the State construction projects, it is recommended that they become certified and should take advantage of the appropriate technical assistance that is made available. In addition, minority businesses who are contacted by owners or bidders must respond promptly whether or not they wish to submit a bid.
SECTION 4: DISPUTE PROCEDURES It is the policy of this state that disputes that involves a person's rights, duties or privileges, should be settled through informal procedures. To that end, minority business disputes arising under these guidelines should be resolved as governed under G.S. 143-128(g). SECTION 5: These guidelines shall apply upon promulgation on state construction projects. Copies of these guidelines may be obtained from the Department of Administration, State Construction Office, (physical address) 301 North Wilmington Street, Suite 450, NC Education Building, Raleigh, North Carolina, 27601-2827, (mail address) 1307 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina, 27699-1307, phone (919) 807-4100, Website: www.nc-sco.com SECTION 6: In addition to these guidelines, there will be issued with each construction bid package provisions for contractual compliance providing minority business participation in the state construction program.
MBGuidelines 2002 - vi-
MINORITY BUSINESS CONTRACT PROVISIONS (CONSTRUCTION) APPLICATION: The Guidelines for Recruitment and Selection of Minority Businesses for Participation in State Construction Contracts are hereby made a part of these contract documents. These guidelines shall apply to all contractors regardless of ownership. Copies of these guidelines may be obtained from the Department of Administration, State Construction Office, (physical address) 301 North Wilmington Street, Suite 450, NC Education Building, Raleigh, North Carolina, 27601-2827, (mail address) 1307 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina, 27699-1307, phone (919) 807-4100, Website: http://www.nc-sco.com MINORITY BUSINESS SUBCONTRACT GOALS: The goals for participation by minority firms as subcontractors on this project have been set at 10%. The bidder must identify on its bid, the minority businesses that will be utilized on the project with corresponding total dollar value of the bid and affidavit (Affidavit A) listing good faith efforts or affidavit (Affidavit B) of self-performance of work, if the bidder will perform work under contract by its own workforce, as required by G.S. 143-128.2(c) and G.S. 143-128.2(f). The lowest responsible, responsive bidder must provide Affidavit C, that includes a description of the portion of work to be executed by minority businesses, expressed as a percentage of the total contract price, which is equal to or more than the applicable goal. OR Provide Affidavit D, that includes a description of the portion of work to be executed by minority businesses, expressed as a percentage of the total contract price, with documentation of Good Faith Effort, if the percentage is not equal to the applicable goal. OR Provide Affidavit B, which includes sufficient information for the State to determine that the bidder does not customarily subcontract work on this type project. The above information must be provided as required. Failure to submit these documents is grounds for rejection of the bid.
MBGuidelines 2002 - vii-
MINIMUM COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS: All written statements, affidavits or intentions made by the Bidder shall become a part of the agreement between the Contractor and the State for performance of this contract. Failure to comply with any of these statements, affidavits or intentions, or with the minority business Guidelines shall constitute a breach of the contract. A finding by the State that any information submitted either prior to award of the contract or during the performance of the contract is inaccurate, false or incomplete, shall also constitute a breach of the contract. Any such breach may result in termination of the contract in accordance with the termination provisions contained in the contract. It shall be solely at the option of the State whether to terminate the contract for breach. In determining whether a contractor has made Good Faith Efforts, the State will evaluate all efforts made by the Contractor and will determine compliance in regard to quantity, intensity, and results of these efforts. Good Faith Efforts include: (1) Contacting minority businesses that reasonably could have been expected to submit a quote and
that were known to the contractor or available on State or local government maintained lists at least 10 days before the bid or proposal date and notifying them of the nature and scope of the work to be performed.
(2) Making the construction plans, specifications and requirements available for review by prospective minority businesses, or providing these documents to them at least 10 days before the bid or proposals are due.
(3) Breaking down or combining elements of work into economically feasible units to facilitate minority participation.
(4) Working with minority trade, community, or contractor organizations identified by the Office for Historically Underutilized Businesses and included in the bid documents that provide assistance in recruitment of minority businesses.
(5) Attending any prebid meetings scheduled by the public owner.
(6) Providing assistance in getting required bonding or insurance or providing alternatives to bonding or insurance for subcontractors.
(7) Negotiating in good faith with interested minority businesses and not rejecting them as unqualified without sound reasons based on their capabilities. Any rejection of a minority business based on lack of qualification should have the reasons documented in writing.
(8) Providing assistance to an otherwise qualified minority business in need of equipment, loan capital, lines of credit, or joint pay agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letters of credit, including waiving credit that is ordinarily required. Assisting minority businesses in obtaining the same unit pricing with the bidder's suppliers in order to help minority businesses in establishing credit.
(9) Negotiating joint venture and partnership arrangements with minority businesses in order to increase opportunities for minority business participation on a public construction or repair project when possible.
(10) Providing quick pay agreements and policies to enable minority contractors and suppliers to meet cash-flow demands.
MBGuidelines 2002 - viii-
APPENDIX E
MBE DOCUMENTATION FOR CONTRACT PAYMENTS Prime Contractor/Architect: _________________________________________________________ Address & Phone: _________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ____________________________________________________________________ Pay Application #: _________________ Period: ________________________________ The following is a list of payments made to Minority Business Enterprises on this project for the above-mentioned period.
MBE FIRM NAME * INDICATE TYPE OF
MBE
AMOUNT PAID
THIS MONTH
TOTAL PAYMENTS TO
DATE
TOTAL AMOUNT
COMMITTED
*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A), American Indian (I), Female (F), Social and Economically Disadvantage (D) Date: ________________ Approved/Certified By: ___________________________________ Name ___________________________________ Title ___________________________________ Signature
SUBMIT WITH EACH PAY REQUEST & FINAL PAYMENT (Revised on 3/14/2003)
Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid
Identification of HUB Certified/ Minority Business Participation
I, ,(Name of Bidder)
do hereby certify that on this project, we will use the following HUB Certified/ minority business asconstruction subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or providers of professional services.
Firm Name, Address and Phone # Work Type *Minority **HUB Category Certified
(Y/N)
*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I),Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (D)
. ** HUB Certification with the state HUB Office required to be counted toward state participation goals.
. The total value of minority business contracting will be ($) .
MBForms 2002-Revised July 2010
Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid
State of North Carolina AFFIDAVIT A – Listing of Good Faith Efforts
County of (Name of Bidder)
Affidavit of
I have made a good faith effort to comply under the following areas checked:
Bidders must earn at least 50 points from the good faith efforts listed for their bid to beconsidered responsive. (1 NC Administrative Code 30 I.0101)
q 1 – (10 pts) Contacted minority businesses that reasonably could have been expected to submit a quote and
that were known to the contractor, or available on State or local government maintained lists, at least 10 daysbefore the bid date and notified them of the nature and scope of the work to be performed.
q 2 --(10 pts) Made the construction plans, specifications and requirements available for review by prospective
minority businesses, or providing these documents to them at least 10 days before the bids are due.
q 3 – (15 pts) Broken down or combined elements of work into economically feasible units to facilitate minority
participation.
q 4 – (10 pts) Worked with minority trade, community, or contractor organizations identified by the Office of
Historically Underutilized Businesses and included in the bid documents that provide assistance in recruitmentof minority businesses.
q 5 – (10 pts) Attended prebid meetings scheduled by the public owner.
q 6 – (20 pts) Provided assistance in getting required bonding or insurance or provided alternatives to bonding
or insurance for subcontractors.
q 7 – (15 pts) Negotiated in good faith with interested minority businesses and did not reject them as unqualified
without sound reasons based on their capabilities. Any rejection of a minority business based on lack ofqualification should have the reasons documented in writing.
q 8 – (25 pts) Provided assistance to an otherwise qualified minority business in need of equipment, loan
capital, lines of credit, or joint pay agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letters of credit, including waivingcredit that is ordinarily required. Assisted minority businesses in obtaining the same unit pricing with thebidder's suppliers in order to help minority businesses in establishing credit.
q 9 – (20 pts) Negotiated joint venture and partnership arrangements with minority businesses in order to
increase opportunities for minority business participation on a public construction or repair project whenpossible.
q 10 - (20 pts) Provided quick pay agreements and policies to enable minority contractors and suppliers to meet
cash-flow demands.
The undersigned, if apparent low bidder, will enter into a formal agreement with the firms listed in theIdentification of Minority Business Participation schedule conditional upon scope of contract to beexecuted with the Owner. Substitution of contractors must be in accordance with GS143-128.2(d)Failure to abide by this statutory provision will constitute a breach of the contract.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of the minority businesscommitment and is authorized to bind the bidder to the commitment herein set forth.
Date:Name of Authorized Officer:
Signature:
Title:
State of______________, County of
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20
Notary Public
My commission expires
SEAL
MBForms 2002-Revised July 2010
Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid
State of North Carolina --AFFIDAVIT B-- Intent to Perform Contract
with Own Workforce.County of
Affidavit of
(Name of Bidder)
I hereby certify that it is our intent to perform 100% of the work required for the
contract.
(Name of Project)
In making this certification, the Bidder states that the Bidder does not customarily subcontract elementsof this type project, and normally performs and has the capability to perform and will perform allelements of the work on this project with his/her own current work forces; and
The Bidder agrees to provide any additional information or documentation requested by the owner insupport of the above statement. The Bidder agrees to make a Good Faith Effort to utilize minoritysuppliers where possible.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read this certification and is authorized to bind theBidder to the commitments herein contained.
Date: Name of Authorized Officer:
Signature:
Title:
State of _________ __ , County of ________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20___
Notary Public
My commission expires
SEAL
MBForms 2002-Revised July 2010
Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid
State of North Carolina - AFFIDAVIT C - Portion of the Work to bePerformed by HUB Certified/Minority BusinessesCounty of
(Note this form is to be submitted only by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder.)
If the portion of the work to be executed by HUB certified/minority businesses as defined in GS143-128.2(g) and 128.4(a),(b),(e) is equal to or greater than 10% of the bidders total contract price, then thebidder must complete this affidavit.This affidavit shall be provided by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder within 72 hoursafter notification of being low bidder.
Affidavit of I do hereby certify that on the(Name of Bidder)
(Project Name)
Project ID# Amount of Bid $
I will expend a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with minority businessenterprises. Minority businesses will be employed as construction subcontractors, vendors, suppliersor providers of professional services. Such work will be subcontracted to the following firms listedbelow. Attach additional sheets if required
Name and Phone Number *MinorityCategory
**HUBCertified
Y/N
WorkDescription
Dollar Value
*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I),Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (D)
** HUB Certification with the state HUB Office required to be counted toward state participation goals.
Pursuant to GS143-128.2(d), the undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with Minority Firms forwork listed in this schedule conditional upon execution of a contract with the Owner. Failure to fulfillthis commitment may constitute a breach of the contract.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of this commitment and isauthorized to bind the bidder to the commitment herein set forth.
Date: Name of Authorized Officer:
Signature:
Title:
State of , County of
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20
Notary Public
My commission expires
SEAL
MBForms 2002-Revised July 2010
Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid
State of North Carolina AFFIDAVIT D – Good Faith Efforts
County of
(Note this form is to be submitted only by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder.)
If the goal of 10% participation by HUB Certified/ minority business is not achieved, the Bidder shallprovide the following documentation to the Owner of his good faith efforts:
Affidavit of I do hereby certify that on the(Name of Bidder)
(Project Name)
Project ID# Amount of Bid $
I will expend a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with HUB certified/minority business enterprises. Minority businesses will be employed as construction subcontractors,vendors, suppliers or providers of professional services. Such work will be subcontracted to thefollowing firms listed below. (Attach additional sheets if required)
Name and Phone Number *MinorityCategory
**HUBCertified
Y/N
WorkDescription
Dollar Value
*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I),Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (D)
** HUB Certification with the state HUB Office required to be counted toward state participation goals.
Examples of documentation that may be required to demonstrate the Bidder's good faith efforts to meet the goals set forth in these provisions
include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
A. Copies of solicitations for quotes to at least three (3) minority business firms from the source list provided by the State for each subcontract
to be let under this contract (if 3 or more firms are shown on the source list). Each solicitation shall contain a specific description of the
work to be subcontracted, location where bid documents can be reviewed, representative of the Prime Bidder to contact, and location, date
and time when quotes must be received.
B. Copies of quotes or responses received from each firm responding to the solicitation.
C. A telephone log of follow-up calls to each firm sent a solicitation.
D. For subcontracts where a minority business firm is not considered the lowest responsible sub-bidder, copies of quotes received from allfirms submitting quotes for that particular subcontract.
E. Documentation of any contacts or correspondence to minority business, community, or contractor organizations in an attempt to meet the goal.
F. Copy of pre-bid roster
G. Letter documenting efforts to provide assistance in obtaining required bonding or insurance for minority business.
H. Letter detailing reasons for rejection of minority business due to lack of qualification.
I. Letter documenting proposed assistance offered to minority business in need of equipment, loan capital, lines of credit, or joint pay
agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letter of credit, including waiving credit that is ordinarily required.
Failure to provide the documentation as listed in these provisions may result in rejection of the bid and award to the next lowest responsible
and responsive bidder.
-1-
MBForms 2002-Revised May 2010
Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid
Pursuant to GS143-128.2(d), the undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with Minority Firms forwork listed in this schedule conditional upon execution of a contract with the Owner. Failure to fulfillthis commitment may constitute a breach of the contract.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of this commitment and isauthorized to bind the bidder to the commitment herein set forth.
Date: Name of Authorized Officer: Signature:
Title:
State of , County of
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20
Notary Public
My commission expires
SEAL
-2-
MBForms 2002-Revised May 2010
Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid
Sheet for Attaching Power of Attorney
-3-
MBForms 2002-Revised May 2010
Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid
Sheet for Attaching Insurance Certificates
-4-
MBForms 2002-Revised May 2010
APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT(APPENDIX E - MBE DOCUMENTS) MUST BE ATTACHED)
TO: The University of North Carolina at Greensboro APPLICATION # Project Office DATE: Attn: (Project Manager)PO Box 26170 PERIOD TO: Greensboro, NC 27402-6170 CONTRACT DATE:
PROJECT & PROJECT #:
CONTRACTOR:
CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY CONTRACT STATUS
Change Orders Additions/ DeductionsOriginal Contract Sum $
Approved in Previous Mos. Net Change byby the Owner Change Order. $
TOTAL Contract Sum to Date $
APPROVED THIS MONTHTotal Completed & Stored to Date $
TOTALSNet Change by Change Orders Current Payment Due. $
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
The herein named contractor certifies that based on current information and to the best of his knowledge and belief, the workcovered by this Application for Payment has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents; that all amountshave been paid by him for work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from theUniversity, and that current payment shown herein is now due.
State of: ___________________________ County of: ________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this __________________ day of __________, 20___.
Notary Public: ______________________ My Commission Expires: ____
006276.10-1Project No. 16-20
SALES TAX REPORTING FORM
Contractors performing contract for the University must provide the University a signed statement containingthe information listed in G.S. 105-164.14(a).
In lieu of obtaining copies of sales receipts the information is to be provided on the attached form.
In the event that several purchases are made from the same vendor, the certified statement must indicate theinvoice numbers, the inclusive dates of the invoices, the total amount of the invoices, the counties, and thecounty sales and use taxes paid thereon.
The statement must also include the cost of any tangible personal property withdrawn from the contractorswarehouse stock and the amount of county sales or use tax paid thereon by the contractor.
Similar certified statements by his subcontractors must be obtained by the General contractor and furnishedto the University.
The statement of property purchased is NOT TO INCLUDE tax paid on supplies, tools and equipment usedto perform contracts.
Only those building materials, supplies, fixtures and equipment which actually become part of the building orstructure are to be included.
006276.13-1Project No. 15-18
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINACOUNTY SALES AND USE TAX REPORTSUMMARY TOTALS AND CERTIFICATION
CONTRACTOR: Page __1____ of ______
PROJECT: FOR PERIOD:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTAL FORCOUNTY OF:
TOTALALL COUNTIES
CONTRACTOR
SUBCONTRACTOR(S)*
COUNTY TOTAL
* Attach subcontractor(s) report(s)** Must balance with Detail Sheet(s)
I certify that the above figures do not include any tax paid on supplies, tools and equipment which were used to perform this contractand only includes those building materials, supplies, fixtures and equipment which actually became a part of or annexed to the buildingor structure. I certify that, to the best of my knowledge, the information provided here is true, correct, and complete.
Sworn to and subscribed before me,
This the _______ day of _____________, 20____Signed
Notary Public
My Commission Expires: Print or Type Name of Above
Seal NOTE:This certified statement may be subject to audit.
006276.13-2Project No. 15-18
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINASALES AND USE TAX REPORT DETAIL
CONTRACTOR: Page ___2___ of ______
SUBCONTRACTOR FOR PERIOD:
PROJECT:
PURCHASEDATE
VENDORNAME
INVOICENUMBER
TYPE OFPROPERTY
INVOICETOTAL
COUNTYTAX PAID
COUNTYOF SALE *
$ $
TOTAL: $
* If this is an out-of-state vendor, the County of Sale should be the county to which the merchandise was shipped.
011100-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 011100 SCOPE OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work covered by the contract documents:
A. Work under this contract consists of furnishing labor, materials, and equipment necessaryto perform the following work, which includes, but is not limited to:
B. Division 02 - Existing conditions, demolition:1. Remove drywall infill panels in noted locations.2. Mechanical devices noted for removal or relocation.3. Electrical devices, conduit, and wiring where noted.
C. Division 03 - Concrete:Membrane concrete curing.
D. Division 05 - Metals:1. Light gauge galvanized steel studs.2. Galvanized steel furring strips and hat channels.
E. Division 06 - Carpentry:1. Miscellaneous wood blocking.2. Wood trim.
F. Division 07 - Moisture Protection:1. Fiberglass sound batt insulation.2. Caulking and sealants.
G. Division 08 - Doors, Windows, and Glass:1. Hollow metal frames, wood doors, and hardware.2. Glazing for new wood doors.3. Coiling shutter at mail pickup counter.4. Finished hardware.
H. Division 09 - Finishes:1. Plaster repair.2. New drywall.3. Acoustical tile ceiling and grid.4. Modular carpeting.5. Vinyl cove base in finished areas and where noted on the drawings.6. Painting.
I. Division 21 - Fire Suppression:Modifications to the existing fire sprinkler system.
J. Division 23 - Heating, Cooling, and Air Conditioning:Rework existing mechanical systems to accommodate new work.
K. Division 26 - Electrical:New electrical lighting fixtures, devices, conduit, and wiring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.
End of Section
012633-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 012633 CHANGE ORDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE:A. Change Orders are required to be issued whenever an amendment of a Contract or
Purchase Order is required to accommodate a change in: quantity, price, performance,terms and conditions, specifications and/or statement of work.
B. Note:Change Orders are limited to twenty-five percent of the total amount of the initial purchaseorder award price. Change Order requests, which exceed this limitation, must beaccompanied by a written justification by the campus department and are subject to thePurchasing Department's review and approval.
C. As is the case with the Purchase Order, the Change Order can only be issued by thePurchasing Department as only the Purchasing Department is authorized to change oramend a contractual liability of the University initially established by the issuance of aPurchase Order. A copy of the completed Change Order is provided to all departmentshaving received a copy of the original Purchase Order (whether in 'hard copy' or by theautomated purchasing system). Changes to Purchase Orders should be kept to aminimum; however, more than one change order may be issued for a single PurchaseOrder.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used
End of Section
013323-1Project 16-20
DIVISION 01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes:A. Requirements for information to be provided in submittals.B. Submittal procedures for shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's installation data and
samples.1.02 Related Requirements in other Sections:
A. Product options and substitutions (Section 016000).B. Definitions and additional responsibilities of parties (General Conditions).C. Requirements of individual Sections of Specifications.
1.03 Shop Drawings:A. Shop Drawings are drawings, sketches, diagrams, or other data prepared for the Work by
the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate someportion of the Work. The use of manufacturer's standard catalog details without modificationis prohibited.
B. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each shop drawing with Project name andnumber, identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.D. Details shall indicate materials to be used by product identification and their relation to as-
built conditions. Show all fasteners including size, length, and spacing. Generic details ofthe membrane manufacturer may be submitted for information but will not be accepted asshop drawings.
1.04 Product Data:A. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance capabilities and charts,
instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished to illustrate a material,product, or system for some portion of the Work.
B. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data toidentify pertinent products, referenced to Specification section and Article number. Showreference standards, and performance characteristics; finishes; dimensions; and requiredclearances.
C. Modify manufacturer's standard drawings and information in order to provide informationspecifically applicable to the work of this Contract. Delete information not applicable.
1.05 Samples:A. Label each sample to clearly identify material and function, and specific specification section
which is applicable.B. Samples shall be in triplicate, one to be retained by the Architect, one to be returned to the
Contractor and one to be placed on file in the Contractor's field office for comparison to thematerials delivered.
1.06 Contractor Review:A. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field
construction criteria, manufacturer's catalog numbers, and conformance of submittal withrequirements of Contract Documents.
B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and of Contract Documents. All submittalsshall be transmitted to the Architect/Engineer in ample time to prevent delays in the work. Shop drawings shall be submitted in advance of start of work of this project.
C. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product data, and each sample label to certifycompliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing at time ofsubmittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittalwith Architect/Engineer acceptance.
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (CONTINUED)
013323-2Project 16-20
1.07 Submittal Requirements:A. All Shop Drawings, Project Data, and Samples shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer,
through the Contractor, for review. B. All Shop Drawings for the initial submission shall be submitted in the form of one reproducible
copy (sepia media) and two prints for each sheet required. After the Architect/Engineer'sreview, this reproducible will be returned to the Contractor. Should printed catalog data berequired with the submission, four copies shall be submitted. Two copies will be retained bythe Architect who will forward one copy to the Owner, and the remainder will be returned tothe Contractor.
C. Transmit submittals in such sequence to avoid delay in the work or work of other contracts. All such submittals must be accompanied by a transmittal letter indicating:
PROJECT NUMBER AND TITLEVENDOR'S OR MANUFACTURER'S NAMELIST OF SHOP DRAWINGS NUMBERS, TITLES & QUANTITIES OF EACH
D. Provide 4" x 4" blank space on each submittal for Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps.E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying to review, verification of products, field
dimensions and field construction criteria, and coordination of information with requirementsof work and Contract Documents.
F. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items.G. Number of Submittals Required:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Architect/Engineer one (1) reproducible on mylar filmand two (2) bluelines.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two(2) additional copies to the Architect/Engineer, one of which will be forwarded to theOwner.
3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section but in no case lessthan two (2) samples shall be submitted.
H. Submittals Shall Contain:1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.2. The Project title and number.3. Contract identification, including names of Contractor, Supplier and Manufacturer.4. Identification of the product, with the Specification section number.5. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.6. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.7. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.8. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.9. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.10. Contractor's stamp "For Approval Only". All submittals not so stamped will not be
accepted for review.11. Contractor's stamp certifying review of submittal by the Contractor.
1.08 Resubmittals:A. When corrections are necessary and a resubmittal is not requested, two copies of corrected
"field use" drawings will be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for file purposes. Whereresubmittal is requested, the Contractor shall make all corrections required by theArchitect/Engineer and shall resubmit accordingly.
B. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes madesince previous submittal.
C. Shop Drawings and Product Data:1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
Clearly indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested bythe Architect/Engineer.
2. When stamped for construction, submit two (2) reproducibles to theArchitect/Engineer.
D. Samples: Submit new samples, as required, for initial submittal.
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (CONTINUED)
013323-3Project 16-20
1.09 Architect/Engineer Duties:A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule.
Transmittal turnaround time shall be approximately seven (7) days after receipt byArchitect/Engineer.
B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal, or approvalof submittal.
C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for re-submission.1.10 Owner's Duties:
A. Approval or acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples will not preclude therejection of the completed Work. After approval, no change in brand or make will bepermitted unless agreed to in writing by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to requiresubmission of examples of any materials whether or not required by the Contract Documents.
B. The Owner's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples shall not relieve theContractor from its responsibility for complying with the Drawings and Specifications, for theaccuracy of the Work, nor for the furnishing of all materials required for the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.
End of Section
014300-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 014300 QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 The General Contractor shall maintain quality control over products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
1.02 The General Contractor shall arrange with material and equipment manufacturers andrepresentatives, if required or requested by the Architect/Engineer, to provide qualified personnelto instruct installers, the Owner's maintenance personnel, and any other parties designated bythe Owner on the proper handling, installation, and maintenance of materials and equipment usedon this project.
1.03 Contractor shall provide a complete set of Drawings, shop drawings, and Specifications at adesignated location on the project at all times for the use of all parties.
1.04 Telephone:A. The Contractor shall provide at this expense, a job telephone, mobile telephone, cell
telephone, or pager for project communications for the duration of the contract.B. Local calls shall be paid by the General Contractor, toll calls shall be paid by the party
making the call.1.05 Emergency Call List:
The Contractor shall supply the Owner with an Emergency Call List of the Contractor'sSupervision responsible for contacting Contractor's personnel in emergencies. The Contractorshall furnish and maintain pagers for the Contractor's Supervision. The Contractor shall beresponsible for designating its supervision which will carry the pagers.
1.06 PROGRESS SCHEDULE:A. The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Owner a Progress Schedule satisfactory
to the Owner covering all Work on the Project within twenty (20) days after a writtenNotice to Proceed or of the Contract Date. The Progress Schedule shall describe, inwritten form, the general step-by-step procedure of Work.
B. The Progress Schedule shall show the date when the operation of each SpecificationSection is to begin and is to be completed and the dollar value to be completed eachmonth. Each Progress Schedule, after the first submission, shall incorporate a progressgraph comparing the percent of the total work actually completed by the Contractoragainst that anticipated by the Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall beupdated bimonthly unless the Owner requires more frequent revision, in CPM format.
C. If the Contractor at any time knows or has reason to believe that the delivery of any itemof material or equipment or the shortage of qualified labor or delays caused by others orthe occurrence of any other difficulty may cause a delay in carrying out the approvedorder of Work of the Progress Schedule, the Contractor shall notify the Architect in writingwithin three (3) days of acquiring such knowledge, but in any event, within three (3)calendar days of the commencement of the delay.
1.07 Work found to be in violation of the specifications, or not in conformance with acceptableconstruction practices, shall be subject to rejection including complete removal and replacementwith new material at the Contractor's expense.
1.08 Discrepancies:If during the performance of the Work, the Contractor discovers errors or discrepancies in theDrawings or Specifications, then the Contractor shall promptly bring these to the attention of theArchitect/Engineer in writing which shall promptly reconcile such errors or discrepancies. TheOwner will not be liable for any costs incurred by the Contractor due to such errors ordiscrepancies if the Contractor proceeds with the Work in question without the written approval ofthe Architect/Engineer.
1.09 Pre-construction, progress, and coordination Meetings:A. Pre-construction conference:
Prior to commencement of construction, a pre-construction conference shall bescheduled at the site by the Architect and the Owner. The following parties shall berepresented: General Contractor and his Job Superintendent, Owner's Representative,major Sub-Contractors, and the Project Architect/Engineers.
B. Construction progress and coordination meetings:1. Frequency:
At a maximum, bi-weekly progress and coordination meetings are to be
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 014300 QUALITY CONTROL (CONTINUED)
014300-2Project No. 16-20
scheduled and held at the project site.2. Attendees:
The following parties shall be represented at all project meetings:General Contractor and his Job Superintendent, Owner's Representatives,subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, Project Designers, and otherconcerned parties.
3. Minutes:The Architect shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including the projectdesigners and the Owner’s Representative. Minutes will be transmitted via emailin PDF format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.
End of Section
015000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Utilities/Equipment:A. Use of existing utilities, power and/or water will be furnished by the Owner for his work.
Necessary connections to be by the Contractor.B. Should usage become excessive, as determined solely by the Owner’s representative,
the Contractor shall pay City rates for the utility usage.1.02 Ventilation:
Provide, as required, facilities to maintain specific storage conditions as described within thisspecification and as recommended by materials manufacturers for use in construction.
1.03 Sanitary Facilities:A. The Owner, at his discretion, will designate existing toilet facilities for use by the workmen
on the site.B. Temporary facilities shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary, located where
directed for accommodations of all persons engaged on the work. Toilets shall beequipped with temporary water closets, enclosed, and kept in sanitary and approvedcondition at all times.
1.04 Construction Aids:A. Contractor shall provide scaffolding and ladders for access to roof and high work areas at
all times during construction. Scaffolding and ladders shall meet all OSHA safetyrequirements. Contractor shall provide ladders for access to all adjacent work areas. Existing facilities of the Owner outside the area of construction may not be used forstorage during construction.
B. Construction cranes shall be permitted on site only at times approved by the facilitymanager.
C. Construction Fencing:1. The contractor shall install a free-standing 6'-0" high chain link fence with screen
installed on the inside of the fence to obscure vision into the project staging andwork areas prior to the commencement of construction and shall remove theconstruction fence at the end of construction.
2. The location of the construction fence shall be located where indicated on thedrawings, and shall not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic and the buildingexits. The contractor shall coordinate with the Architect and the Owner’sRepresentative the final location of the construction fence prior to installation.
3. All existing entrances and/or fire exits are to be maintained by the Contractorduring the period of construction. The contractor shall provide accidentprevention signage per NC OSHA requirements.
1.05 Use of Site:A. The Contractor shall be permitted access to the facility during normal business hours until
the project completion date. Access to other building necessary for the completion of hiswork must be approved by the facility manager.
B. The Owner should be advised at least 24 hours prior to commencement of any workwhich could affect facility operations.
C. Utilities that effect use of the facility by the Owner are to be kept in operation, accidentaldamage to existing systems designated to remain operational must be correctedimmediately by the Contractor after notification has been given to the Architect and theOwner. If damages are not corrected in a timely manner, the Owner reserves the right tomake the necessary repairs and deduct this expense for the contract amount.
1.06 Cleaning During Construction:A. The Contractor shall at all times, maintain the Owner's premises, property, and the
Project site in a neat and orderly condition, free from accumulations of waste materialsand rubbish during entire Project period. During the execution of the Work, adjoiningareas shall not be littered or obstructed any more that necessary for the performance ofthe Work. The Contractor shall have the responsibility for removing and disposing of allcartons, crates, trash and all flammable waste materials from the Work areas and forcomplying with all codes and regulations pertaining to the disposal of debris.
B. Residue and debris from construction operations shall not be allowed to accumulate and
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
015000-2Project No. 16-20
shall be removed from the Site and disposed of daily, unless prior arrangement is madewith the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Representative.
C. Project debris and litter shall be disposed of in Contractor’s dumpsters. The use of theOwner’s trash bins and dumpsters is prohibited.
1.07 Project SecurityA. Owner will provide only the security measures required for University operations.B. Contractor shall provide all necessary security means to protect his work, materials, tools,
and construction equipment from vandalism, theft, and fire. Provide fire watch whenusing kettles and torches.
C. Private security services shall be supplied by the contractor as he deems necessary. Anysecurity service set up by the contractor shall be approved by the University.
D. The contractor shall be responsible for replacement of his materials, machinery,equipment, tools and supplies due to theft or mysterious disappearance.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for placing identifying markings on all tools, equipmentand job boxes. Contractors name shall be clearly marked on all job tool storagecontainers.
F. The UNC-G Campus Police should be contacted during any emergency or for after-hourassistance.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordination all work to preventdamage to the existing building by inclement weather, or by unauthorized entry duringunoccupied periods and shall, where necessary, to control and prevent such damage orentry, install temporary closures for openings.
1.08 Smoking:No smoking will be allowed on University property.
1.09 Worker Conduct:A. If the conduct or performance of any of the Contractor's personnel, Sub-Contractor,
material vendor or any other person performing work for the Contractor, or is otherwise onthe Owner’s property as a result of the Contractor’s work, is improper, inappropriate, or isnot in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall remove suchpersons from the Work.
B. Long pants and sleeved shirts are required to be worn at all times. Personnel wearingclothing with obscene designs or profane language will be asked to change clothes or berequired to leave the site.
C. rsonnel observed to be in verbal communication with students, faculty, or guests will berequired to leave the site. The use of all obscene language is prohibited.
D. ntractors personnel are prohibited from having firearms or drugs in their possession whileon the Owner’s property.
1.10 Existing Building Exiting:All accessible entrance and/or fire exits are to be maintained by the general contractor during theperiod of construction.
1.11 Construction Parking:A. Parking at construction site shall be in accordance with requirements of the Office of
Facilities Design and Construction.B. All contractors are notified that non-permitted parking is restricted to the area within the
project limits. Vehicles outside the project limits will be ticketed. Parking permits must bepurchased from the University Parking Services Department at the Walker Parking Deck. Permit fees apply to both personal and commercial vehicles. The UNC-G ProjectManager will contact the Parking Services Dept and request the number of permits thecontractor will be allowed to purchase for the project. University parking fees per vehicleare as follows: yearly $235, monthly $25, Daily $4.
1.12 Removal of Temporary Utilities and Facilities:General Construction Contractor shall remove all temporary utilities and facilities at the end of theconstruction period, earlier with the approval of the Architect and Owner’s Construction ProjectManger. Removal of temporary utilities and facilities to be coordinated with the university, andapproved by the Owner’s Construction Project Manager.
1.13 Daily Work Hours:University -Program - Working Hours:
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
015000-3Project No. 16-20
A. The contractor may establish a working schedule of his own choosing for the portions ofconstruction involved in the project that do not require interruptions of utility services(electric, water, steam, etc.) to campus facilities. The contractor shall submit to UNCGand to the designer his regular daily work schedule, and shall notify the University ProjectManager in advance of any deviations from the schedule. The University reserves theright to limit the contractor's activities when they conflict with University operations. TheOwner will solely approve the scheduling of all interruptions of utilities to campus facilities.
B. Daily work hours:1. Hours of work shall generally be from 7:00 AM until 6:00 PM, Monday through
Friday.2. Work in or around residence halls shall be limited to the hours between 10:00
A.M. until 6:00 P.M. while the residence hall is occupied. All weekend work, andwork outside the 10:00 A.M. - 6:00 P.M. hours when the residence hall isoccupied will need to be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative.
3. Weekend work and extended work day hours may be permissible with writtenpermission of the Owner.
4. The use of generators, mechanical equipment, and other work items generatingnoise may be restricted within certain work hours.
C. The Contractor shall submit to UNC-G and to the Designer his regular daily workschedule and shall notify the University Project Manager in advance of any deviationsfrom the schedule. The University reserves the right to limit the contractor’s activitieswhen they conflict with University operations. The University will solely approve thescheduling of all interruptions of utilities to campus facilities.
D. UNCG provides an academic calendar on its web page, (www.uncg.edu) listing specialevents that will occur on campus during the construction period of this contract. Thecontractor shall restrict his operations, as required and outlined below, on these days.1. During examination periods, generally occurring in May and December for six (6)
days each, and June and July for two (2) days each.2. Graduation, generally on a Sunday in mid-May and mid-December.3. Student move-in/out days, generally twice a year for one (1) week each.
E. During examination periods the contractor will restrict noise-making activities to the hoursof 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. If the project involves work in or near a building in which anexamination is being conducted, the contractor will be required to restrict operations thatare disturbing to students during the hours of the exam(s).
F. Work will not be permitted on Graduation Day, nor the day preceding it (Saturday), nor onUniversity Day. Extra cleanup, warning signs, and barricades will be provided by thecontractor during these days.
G. Work is normally permitted on days of sporting events, but traffic is extremely heavy onthese days, and Contractors may have difficulty and experience delays getting to andfrom the job site.
H. Work is normally permitted on student move-in/out days but traffic is heavier than normal,parking is restricted, and some campus roads are temporarily closed or designated one-way.
I. Attached to this section are a copies of the academic calendars for the applicable periodsof construction. (http://www.uncg.edu/reg/Calendar/acaCal)
1.14 Project Safety:A. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain strict project safety standards and at all
times take extreme caution to protect the safety of the public.B. No unattended ladders may be left in place.C. Area around all work must be roped-off with clear, highly visible, warning signs posted.D. Protective measures must be maintained in all areas where work will be occurring that
could endanger the safety of the public.E. Scheduled times for deliveries, crane operation, and removal of debris will need to be
coordinated with the local facility managers in order to cause the least amount ofdisturbance to facility activities.
Spring 2017 Academic Calendar January 9–13, Mon.–Fri. Orientation, advising, and registration for all students based on student population and
classification
January 10, Tuesday Undergraduate academic appeals deadline
January 16, Monday Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. holiday. Offices closed.
January 17, Tuesday Classes begin, 8:00 a.m.
January 17–23, Tue.–Mon. Late registration and schedule adjustment
January 23, Monday Financial aid satisfactory academic progress appeals deadline; hours locked for financial aid purposes.
January 23, Monday Last day to change course(s) or course section(s) without special permission
January 23, Monday Last day to withdraw from a course for tuition and fees refund; course withdrawal policy in effect after this date.
January 24, Tuesday Deadline for graduate students to apply to graduate in May 2017
February 1–28 Undergraduate Students declare or change major in February.
February 3, Friday Final deadline for undergraduates to apply to graduate in May 2017
February 17, Friday Deadline for undergraduates to apply to student teach during Spring 2018
March 1, Wednesday Financial aid priority filing date for 2016–17 academic year
March 10, Friday Last day to withdraw from a course without incurring a WF grade (withdraw failing)
March 11, Saturday Instruction ends for Spring Break, 1:00 p.m.
March 20, Monday Classes resume after Spring Break, 8:00 a.m.
Mar. 20–Apr. 26, Mon.–Wed. Fall 2017 advising for continuing students, by appointment
March 22, Wednesday Final date for May doctoral candidates' oral examinations
March 29, Wednesday Deadline for filing dissertation and original signature pages with the Graduate School
Apr. 3–Apr. 26, Mon.–Wed. Fall 2017 registration for continuing students
April 11, Tuesday Deadline for filing thesis with the Graduate School
University Registrar's Office
April 13, Thursday Student Excellence DaySpring holiday.
April 14, Friday Classes dismissed; offices closed.
May 2, Tuesday University follows Friday schedule; last day of classes.
May 3, Wednesday Final date for complete clearance of May candidates for graduate degrees. Deadline for final submission of thesis or dissertation to the Graduate School.
May 3, Wednesday Reading Day
May 4–6, May 8–10, Thurs.–Sat., Mon.–Wed.
Final examinations
May 12, Friday May Commencement, Greensboro Coliseum
Approved by the Faculty Senate May 6, 2015. Approved by the Chancellor June 10, 2015.
1.01 Products:A. Products include materials, equipment and systems.B. Comply with specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.C. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as
specifically required or allowed by Contract Documents.1.02 Co-Operation:
A. The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors shall co-ordinate their work with all adjacent workand shall cooperate with all trades to facilitate general progress of their work.
B. It is the responsibility of all the Contractors to keep the Architect and the Owner fullyinformed of work schedules and to contact the Architect and the Owner at least 24 hoursprior to commencement of any phase of work that may affect any of the Owners on siteactivities.
1.03 Workmanship:A. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship and quality
specified.B. The Job Foreman shall provide full-time supervision. Job Foreman must speak and
communicate in English. At no time shall mechanics and laborers be left on-site withoutsupervision of the Job Foreman without notifying the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and competent Superintendent/ProjectManager to supervise all of the Work on site. Where the extent of the Work is such that afull time Superintendent/Project Manager is not justified, the Contractor's Foreman is tobe appointed to oversee the Work of the others, attend Owner's meetings and to be theContractor's representative on site for the purpose of making on-site decisions.
1.04 Personnel:A. If the conduct or performance of any Subcontractor, material-vendor or any other person
or entity performing Work under a contract or agreement with the Contractor is improperor is not in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall terminatethe contract or agreement of such Subcontractor, material-vendor, person or entity andremove it from the Work. The Contractor shall have the responsibility of ensuring that atermination provision setting for the foregoing agreement is included in each contract,purchase order, Subcontract or service agreement into which it enters with respect to theWork.
B. If the conduct or performance of any of the Contractor's personnel is improper or is not instrict accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall remove suchpersons from the Work.
1.05 Materials:A. All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Workmanship shall be of the
highest caliber of the particular trade involved. Also, except as exceeded or qualified bythe Specifications, workmanship shall be as stipulated in written standards of recognizedorganizations of institutes of the respective trades.
B. Should the Specifications and Drawings fail to particularly describe the material or kind ofgoods to be used in any place, then it shall be the duty of the Contractor to make inquiryof the Architect/Engineer for what is best suited. The material that would normally beused in this place to produce first quality finished Work shall be considered a part of theContract.
C. Materials as required by this Contract shall be provided by one manufacturer for eachitem unless specified otherwise or unless exception is made by the Architect/Engineer.
D. Materials Containing Asbestos:No materials containing asbestos are to be used on this project. If the Contractorencounters any such materials other than what is noted on the drawings or in thespecifications for removal, or if any such materials are submitted for approval, he shouldat once contact the Architect who will authorize removal or replacement.
1.06 Manufacturer's Instructions:Work shall be performed in accordance with the Material Manufacturer's specifications or asmodified by Contract Documents. Conflicts between these specifications and the Materials
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED)
016000-2Project No. 16-20
Manufacturer's specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior tobeginning construction. Work as relates to conflict shall not proceed until conflicts aresatisfactorily resolved by Architect/Engineer.
1.07 Transportation and Handling:A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage. Deliver all materials with
Manufacturer's labels intact and legible.B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent damage.C. Timing of deliveries of materials to the site to be coordinated with the Owner.
1.08 Storage and Protection:A. Store any material susceptible to water damage in clean, dry, weather tight condition in a
manner to protect against loss, damage, and wetting. On site storage of materials to becoordinated with the Owner’s representative. Wet materials shall be marked, rejected forinstallation, and removed from the Site.
B. Materials subject to moisture intrusion and damage shall be stored on clean, dry, andraised platforms so as to prevent wetting or moisture absorption and yet provide sufficientventilation to prevent condensation. These materials shall be covered so as to becompletely weathertight. Factory-applied wrapping shall be unacceptable as the solemeans of protection.
C. Any materials which when subject to moisture intrusion may have a detrimental effect onthe installation of the roofing system, shall be stored as indicated Item 1.07B.
D. Materials that are damaged in any way or indicate moisture content above equilibriumshall be rejected as unacceptable.
E. Contractor shall employ all means possible to protect the remaining Owner's Facilitiesfrom water intrusion. All materials used in the protection of the facilities shall be approvedroofing membrane materials. The use of Visqueen, duct tape, or other similar materials bythe Contractor is not acceptable for temporary protection.
1.09 Product Options:Contractor Product Selection:A. Products specified only by referenced standard: Any product meeting that standard.B. Products specified by naming several manufacturers: Products of any named
manufacturer meeting specifications.C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers and "or as approved"; Submit a
request for substitution in accordance with Item 1.09 of this Section.1.10 Substitutions:
A. After award of the contract and prior to commencing work, the Architect/Engineer willconsider requests from the Contractor for substitutions. Substitutions will then beconsidered only when a product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposedsubstitution with Contract Documents.
C. A substitution request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds,
in all respects, specified product.2. Shall provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified product.3. Shall coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for
work to be complete in all respects.4. Waives claims for additional costs which may consequently become apparent.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawingsor Product Data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance willrequire substantial revision of Contract Documents.
E. Samples of proposed substitutions shall be submitted with the request for substitution. Shop Drawings will not be considered for review on materials which have not beencompletely checked and stamped by the Contractor and, if substitutions, have not beenpreviously submitted as called for in Section 013323.
F. The Architect/Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitution and will notifythe Contractor of acceptance or rejection in writing within a reasonable time.
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED)
016000-3Project No. 16-20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.
End of Section
017000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 017000 EXECUTION AND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Closeout Procedures:A. A final inspection shall be conducted at the completion of the project at a time and date
acceptable to the Architect, Owner, and Contractor. The final inspection shall be attendedby the General Contractor, Owner’s Representative, the Architect, Consulting Engineer,primary Sub-Contractors, and other designated persons.
B. The results of the inspection conducted by these parties, shall be recorded by theArchitect. Items found to be incomplete or not in accordance with the contract documentsshall be noted and a written punchlist forwarded to the Contractor for remedial action. The Owner shall also receive a copy of the punchlist.
C. Contractor shall remedy any and all deficiencies prior to final acceptance by the Architect.1.03 Final Cleanup:
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.1.04 Closeout Documentation:
A. Project Record Documents:1. At termination of work, the Contractor shall submit three sets of record drawings
for approval by the Architect and submission to the Owner at the completion ofthe project.
2. These drawings shall note the location of capped utilities, active utilitiesencountered during demolition in the area of work, or other such informationwhich could be of use during the construction of the future elementary school tobe located at this site.
3. Submit "as built" documents with letter of transmittal indicating date, projectnumber, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature ofContractor. “As-built” documents must be submitted prior to the Owner releasingfinal payment for the project.
B Guaranties/Warranties:1. Provide copies of all contractor’s and manufacturer’s guaranties and warranties
requested properly executed in triplicate.2. Guaranties and warranties shall state name of project, location, name of Owner,
name of Applicator, and date of substantial completion and final acceptance.3. Date of substantial completion and final acceptance will be as determined by the
Architect for the entire project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.
End of Section
024100-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 02. SITE WORK
SECTION 024100 DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes:Work of this Section includes demolition and removal of all materials shown on Drawings and asspecified herein within boundaries of work.1. Demolish and remove in its entirety the following items:
A. Sections of drywall infill panels shown for removal at the Sustainability Office.B. Thermostats, mechanical ductwork, diffusers, and return air grilles to be
removed, relocated, or reworked as noted on the drawings.C. Electrical devices, conduit, and wiring where noted. D. Miscellaneous items not listed above which must be removed for completion of
the work.2. Removal of all debris from the site.3. Obtain necessary permits and comply with all local ordinances for demolition work and
disposal of construction debris.4. Provide temporary partitions and dust barriers for noise, dust control and protection,
existing construction to remain, and equipment.5. Cap and identify exposed utilities, connect utilities to remain as shown on the drawings.6. Security and safety measures, to include guardrails, barricades, roping, and safety tape
around the area of work. Post warning signs as necessary to discourage unauthorizedentry by the public in the areas of demolition.
7. Lead containing materials:A. Due to age of the facilities being demolished or renovated, the Contractor should
expect to encounter building materials that contain lead or that are covered withlead containing coatings. The Contractor shall protect his workforce and worksiteaccording to the provisions of 29 CFR 1926-the OSHA Construction IndustryStandards during the course of the Work. The Owner considers the Contractor'sadherence to workplace safety and health standards a reasonable precaution toprevent excessive exposure to lead hazards.
B. These standards include (but are not limited to ) provisions for worker exposureassessments, engineering controls, work practices, written programs,administrative programs, respiratory protection, protective clothing/equipment,hygiene facilities, medical surveillance programs and / or employeeinformation/training.
C. In addition, following any disturbance of potentially lead-containing substances,the Contractor(s) shall perform adequate cleaning to prevent lead exposure ofOwners' employees, the general public and other trades.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for waste categorization of any lead coatedmaterial or debris and proper disposal of same in a disposal facility permitted toaccept the material or debris.
1.02 Submittals:A. Submit a copy of all permits and certificates required for work of this Section.B. Submit demolition procedures and operational sequence for review and acceptance by
the Owner. These procedures shall include the following:1. Description of methods and equipment to be used.2. Schedule of coordination of utility services.3. Methods to be used for disposal of debris.4. Scheduled hours of work to be approved in advance by the Owner.
1.03 Protection:A. Safety measures and methods shall be used to protect personnel and property which is to
remain undisturbed.B. Schedule all work to cause minimum disturbance to facility operations. Advise the Owner
48 hours prior to beginning any work which could affect facility operations.C. Do not interfere with use of the existing facility. Maintain free and safe passage to and
from all areas normally trafficked by students, staff, and visitors.D. Use approved methods to provide dust control during demolition.E. Provide protection to adjacent construction and equipment not a part of this project from
DIVISION 02. SITE WORK
SECTION 024100 DEMOLITION (CONTINUED)
024100-2Project No. 16-20
damage, and other areas where work is in progress.F. Salvageable items noted for reuse shall be protected from damage, other items noted for
salvage for the Owner, shall be turned over to him.G. Contractor shall schedule and coordinate work to prevent damage to the existing building
by un-authorized entry during unoccupied periods, and shall, where necessary, to controland prevent such damage or entry, install temporary closures for openings.
H. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of all public sidewalks that border thesite. Any damage is to be repaired by removing damaged sections and replacement.
1.04 Existing Services:A. The Contractor shall disconnect and remove utility services only under the direction of the
Owner. All temporary disconnection of the permanent services, prior to removal of theservices in and to a structure to be demolished, shall be planned and authorized by theArchitect/Engineer and the Owner.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Indicate service lines andcapping locations on Project records.
C. Provide new connections and tie-ins to the utilities in the building as shown on thedrawings.
1.05 Job Conditions:A. Condition of Structures: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of
areas to be demolished.1. Bidders for this work shall make such investigations as they deem necessary to
arrive at a contract price.2. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be
maintained by the Owner in so far as practicable.1.06 Site Examination: The Contractor shall visit the site as necessary prior to beginning any work and
examine all existing equipment and other conditions that might affect his work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Salvaged Materials:A. Any structures or items noted to be salvaged will be designated as such and shall be
removed in a manner that will prevent breakage or undue damage. Material or parts ofstructures which are to be salvaged, such as lumber, pipe, brick, concrete, etc., shall beremoved in the manner directed by the Owner and stacked at the Site for future use.
B. Materials or parts of structures which, in the opinion of the Owner, are not salvageable, orwhich are designated as surplus by the Owner, shall be disposed of at locations off thejob site as approved by the Owner.
2.02 Demolition Equipment: Equipment shall be selected for demolition operations which will notdamage existing building components. Vibratory or percussion equipment shall be avoidedwhenever possible or whenever it will inflict damage to adjacent materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Preparation:A. Maintain exit requirements.B. Erect and maintain measures as required to prevent spread of dust, fumes and smoke to
other parts of the building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damagedsurfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied buildingareas as possible.
3.02 Temporary Shoring and Bracing:A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing shoring and/or bracing for any building
component from which support is removed during construction operations.B. Shoring and bracing shall be designed to support the dead load of the shored element
and any anticipated construction loads.C. Shoring and bracing shall be installed at locations which will not overstress or damage
existing structural members.
DIVISION 02. SITE WORK
SECTION 024100 DEMOLITION (CONTINUED)
024100-3Project No. 16-20
3.03 Demolition:A. All demolition shall be performed in accordance with applicable codes and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work,
including that required for connection to the existing building. Protect existing structuralmembers, flooring to remain, and adjacent partitions.
C. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no cost to the Owner.3.04 Removal:
A. Remove from site contaminated or dangerous materials encountered and dispose of bysafe means so as not to endanger health of workers and public.
B. Remove demolished materials, debris, dust, tools and equipment from site uponcompletion of work. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Architect and the Owner’sRepresentative..
C. Transport all materials removed from demolished area and dispose of off-site. Off-sitedisposal shall be subject to agreement and provisions to be arranged and authorized byArchitect, in accordance with local ordinances.
3.05 Repair:All damage done to existing structures that are to remain shall be repaired to the satisfaction ofthe Architect and the Owner’s Representative. Any unsightly places shall be cleaned up and thesite left in a neat and orderly condition.
End of Section
033923-1Project No: 16-20
DIVISION 03. CONCRETE
SECTION 033923 MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes:A. Application of water-based, acrylic concrete curing and sealing compound to existing
concrete floors in exposed locations.B. Product to provide a permeable film to allow moisture in cured concrete to evaporate.C. Ready-to-use, non-yellowing, water-based compound that cures and seals concrete in
one application.1.02 Quality Assurance:
A. In compliance with the followig:1. AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Class A & B.2. ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A & B.3. ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
B. To comply with all current federal, state, and local maximum allowable VOCrequirements, including US EPA, SCAQMD, and OTC.
C. Dried film to be USDA accepted.D. VOC Content: less than 100 g/L.
1.04 Submittals:A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013323.B. Submit Manufacturer's printed technical and performance data documenting suitability for
B. Performance characteristics equal to Scofield Company SelectSeal Plus.2.02 Materials:
A. Water-based acrylic concrete sealer in a ready-to-use compound formulated of specialacrylic polymers in a true water-based carrier.
B. Shall provide improved resistance to rain, sun, freezing temperatures, most acids, andindustrial chemicals, petroleum, deicing slats, cleaning agents (except aromatic solvents),diluted caustics, and other polutants.
C. Product shall dry to a medium-to-high sheen.D. Formulated to cure, seal, and dustproof new, old, interior, exterior, horizontal, and vertical
concrete surfaces. Shall provide excellent wearing qualities for foot and vehicular trafficwith the ability to be re-coated to restore the original appearance.
E. Product to be tintable, color by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Surface preparation:A. Concrete must be clean and dry.B. All stains, oil, grease, dust, and dirt must be removed prior to application.C. Secure the approval of the manufacturer of any paint, coating, carpet, adhesive, resilient
flooring, floor topping, etc. that will be applied over the finished application.3.02 Mixing:
Gently mix or agitate prior to use. No not mix excessively.3.03 Application:
A. Install using a typical industrial sprayer such as a Chapin 1949, airless sprayer, a lint-freeroller, brush, or lambs wool applicator.
B. Care should be taken to maintain a wet-edge during application to prevent roller marks in
033923-2Project No: 16-20
the dried film.C. Spray application:
1. Material should be sprayed with a nozzle that produces a flow of 0.1 gpm.2. Spray in a fine, fog pattern without spurts and dribbles to form a thin, continuous
film.3. Avoid puddling in low areas.4. If puddles occur, bursh or roll them out.5. Apply two coats at a right angle to the preceeding coat.6. Restrict foot traffic for at least twelve hours after installation.
3.04 Cleanup:A. While still wet, equipment may be cleaned with soap and water.B. Once dry, material may be removed with a solvent such as xylene or toluene.
End of Section
054000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 05. METALS
SECTION 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.01 Section Includes:A. Standard light weight steel studs.B. Cold-formed steel horizontal framing and bridging.C. Metal furring strips.D. Cold-formed steel framing accessories.
1.02 Related Sections:Gypsum dry wall (Section 092900).
1.03 Quality Assurance:Designed in accordance with:A. AISC "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", latest
edition.B. ASTM Specification C-955.C. ASTM A 370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products.D. ASTM A 570/A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-
Rolled, Structural Quality.E. ASTM A 611 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural
Quality.F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.G. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
1.04 Design Requirements:Design system components in accordance with AISI reference; provide for movement ofcomponents due to thermal variations without damage, failure, or excessive stress oncomponents.A. Conform to requirements of the North Carolina State Building Code, Volume 1.B. Interior steel stud assemblies:
1. Withstand 5 pounds per square foot live load, plus weight of assembly.2. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/360 of span under total design loads.
C. Horizontal Assemblies (Ceiling framing over Mechanical 122):1. Withstand 20 pounds per square foot live load, plus weight of assembly.2. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/360th of span under total design loads.
1.05 Submittals:A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified this section.
1. Shop Drawings:A. Indicate locations of cold-formed framing assemblies in project.B. Indicate sizes and spacings of framing components.C. Indicate fastening methods between framing members and to adjacent
products/materialsD. Indicate bearings, anchors, and other products/materials required for
construction activities of this section; indicate products/materials notsupplied by manufacturer of products of this section.
specified in this section.B. Mill Certificates for each type structural framing member, indicating the
DIVISION 05. METALS
SECTION 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING (CONTINUED)
054000-2Project No. 16-20
following information:1. Bare metal thickness of steel, measured to 1/1000 inch.2. Yield strength of steel.3. Tensile strength of steel.4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gage length.5. Chemical analysis of steel.6. Thickness of galvanized coating, measured to 1/1000 inch.
B. Supply all products specified in this section from a single manufacturer.2.02 Components:
A. Studs: Conforming to ASTM C 955 and as follows:1. Material: Mill-certified steel conforming to ASTM A 653, G60 galvanized coating,
and as follows:A. 18 gauge and lighter: Minimum yield strength 33,000 pounds per square
inch.B. 16 gauge and heavier: Minimum yield strength 50,000 pounds per
square inch.2. Shape: Cold-formed C-channel section.3. Thickness: Required for specified design requirements and as indicated on
drawings, 20 gauge minimum.4. Sizes: Required for specified design requirements, and as indicated on drawings.
B. Track:1. Material: Steel, matching material, gage, and finish of studs.2. Shape: Cold-formed channel section.3. Size: Web depth matching studs.
C. Bridging:1. Material: Steel, matching material and finish of studs, 16 gage.2. Shape: Cold-formed channel section.3. Size: 1-1/2 inches web depth.
D. Miscellaneous Framing Components:1. Provide required or indicated items matching material and finish of major steel
components.2. Slip track, foundation clips, end clips, framing clips, bracing, and all applicable
accessories to make a complete installation, sizes to accommodate width ofstuds.
E. Interior furring channels:1. 7/8" galvanized corrosion resistant coated steel, DWC, “hat” type furring
channels.2. 20 gauge.
F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide required or indicated items; provide galvanizedfasteners for assemblies having galvanized major steel components.
DIVISION 05. METALS
SECTION 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING (CONTINUED)
054000-3Project No. 16-20
F. Primer: Zinc-rich primer for galvanized surfaces conforming to FS TT-P-645.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.01 Examination and verification of conditions:A. Bearings and substrates are ready for construction activities of this section.B. Rough-in utilities are in correct locations.
3.02 Installer's Examination:A. Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of this
section are to be performed, provide notification if such conditions are unacceptable.B. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been
corrected is prohibited.C. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of
conditions.3.03 Installation:
A. Field Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.3, and the following:1. Stud-to-track connections: 1/2 inch fillet weld, full length of inside flange
dimension, inside each flange of stud onto track web.2. All other connections: Flat, plug, butt, or seam.3. Minimum steel thickness for welded connections: 18 gauge.4. Welds shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, and AISI
Manual Section E2.5. Touch up all steel bared by welding using zinc-rich paint.
B. Field Fastening:1. Use minimum 2 self-tapping metal screws per connection, unless otherwise
indicated.2. Steel drill screws shall have a protective coating at least equivalent to cadmium or
zinc plating (ASTM A-165 Type NS).C. Installation to be in complete accord with approved manufacturer's recommended
installation instructions.D. Framing heights as noted on drawings.E. Wire tying of components shall not be permitted.F. Splices in framing components, other than runner track, shall not be permitted.G. Provide reinforcement where holes are field cut through load bearing members in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.H. Temporary bracing, where required shall be provided until erection is complete.I. Framing:
1. Align top and bottom tracks to insure plumb installation.2. Install caulk between floor track and floor, studs and walls of different
construction.3. Secure tracks at a maximum of 24" O.C.4. Studs to be secured to continuous runner tracks unless the stud end terminates
at deflection track for non-load bearing conditions.5. Seat studs in both upper and lower tracks square with track flange, with stud end
maximum 1/16 inch from surface of track web.6. Plumb and align all studs vertically, securely attach load bearing studs to flanges
or webs of upper and lower tracks.7. Where splicing of track is necessary between stud spacings, a piece of stud shall
be placed in the track fastened with two screws or welds per flange to each piece
DIVISION 05. METALS
SECTION 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING (CONTINUED)
054000-4Project No. 16-20
of track.8. Install studs 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted on drawings, maximum
2 inches from abutting walls; construct corners using minimum three studs.9. Install double studs at jambs of openings for doors, cased openings, and
windows; install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wallstud spacing.
10. Attach cross studs for attachment of fixtures; install framing between studs forattachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.
11. Provide minimum one row of bridging at mid-height of wall, bridging rows spacednot to exceed 5'-0" on center.
12. Placement of insulation between studs after erection is specified in Section072116.
J. “Hat” type furring channels:1. Install at 16 inches on centers maximum.2. Secure with approved corrosion resistant fasteners through channel flanges to
substrate.3. Install plumb and level.
3.04 Site Tolerances:A. Variation from Plumb: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Variation from Level: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.C. Variation from True Plane: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.D. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/4 inch.E. Variation of Member from Plane: Maximum 1/8 inch.
End of Section
061000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 06 CARPENTRY
SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Rough Carpentry includes carpentry not specified as part of other sections and generally notexposed, unless otherwise indicated. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for:A. Miscellaneous wood blocking or concealed plywood blocking panels.B. Other locations where noted on the drawings.
1.02 References:A. Lumber Standards:
Comply with Southern Forest Products Association, PS 20, and other applicable rules ofrespective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated.
B. Plywood Product Standards:Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not manufactured under PS 1provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated.
1.03 Submittals:A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.B. Submit treatment manufacturer’s instructions for proper use of each type of treated
material.C. For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and
process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicablestandards.
D. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treatedmaterials was reduced to a maximum of 15% prior to shipment to project site.
1.03 Product Handling/Delivery/Storage:Keep materials dry at all times; protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp/wetsurfaces. Stack lumber/plywood and provide air circulation within stacks.
1.04 Job Conditions:Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe/cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location offurring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Factory mark each piece of lumber with type/grade/mill/grading agency, except omit marking fromsurfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
2.02 Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes asrequired by PS 20, fo moisture content specified for each use.
2.03 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 19%maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
2.04 Framing lumber (2" through 4" thick):A. For light framing (less than 6" wide), provide “Stud” grade lumber for stud framing and
“Standard” grade for other light framing, any species.B. For structural framing (6" and wider, 2"-4" thick), provide following grade and species:
#2 grade or better, Douglas Fir (WCLB or WWPA) or Southern Pine (SPIB).2.05 Exposed Framing Lumber (2" through 4" thick):
In finished spaces, where framing will not be concealed by other work, provide followinggrade/species:A. Douglas Fir, Appearance Framing (WWPA).B. Southern Pine, Appearance Grade, Kiln Dried (SPIB).
2.06: Boards (less than 2" thick):A. Exposed Boards:
DIVISION 06 CARPENTRY
SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY (CONTINUED)
061000-2Project No. 16-20
Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide moisture content of 15%maximum, “MC-15" or “K-D”. Where painted finish is indicated, provide Southern Pine,#2 boards (SPIB), or Douglas Fir Construction Boards (WCLB or WWPA).
B. Concealed Boards:Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19% maximummoisture content (S-DRY), Southern Pine #3 Boards (SPIB) or any species gradedstandard boards.
C. Board Sizes:Provide sizes indicated; if not indicated (for sheathing, subflooring and similar uses),provide 1" x 8" boards.
2.07 Miscellaneous Lumber:A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nails,
blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizesindicated, worked into shapes shown, moisture content of 19% maximum for lumberitems not specified t receive wood preservative treatment.
B. Grade:Construction grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber asrequired. Provide #2 boards (SPIB or WWPA).
2.08 Plywood:A. Trademark:
Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.B. Plywood Sheathing:
APA rated sheathing.C. Exposure Durability Classification:
Exterior.D. Span Rating:
24/16.E. Plywood Equipment Backing Panels:
For electrical/telephone equipment, provide fire retardant treated plywood panels withgrade designation, APA C-D Plugged INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or ifnot indicated not less than 1/2".
2.09 Miscellaneous Materials:A. Provide size/type/material/finish as indicated/recommended by applicable standards
complying with Federal Specifications or nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers, andanchoring devices. Provide metal hangers, framing anchors of size/type recommendedby manufacturer for each use including recommending nails.
B. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or area of highrelative humidity, provide fasteners/anchorages with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A-153).
2.10 Wood Treatment:Where lumber or plywood is indicated as “Treated Wood” or Pressure Treated Wood”, orspecified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements or AWPA Standards C2(Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item withAWPB Quality Mark Requirements.A. Pressure treat above and below ground items with water-borne preservatives complying
with AWPB LP-2. After treatment kiln-dry to maximum moisture content of 19%. Treatindicated items and the following:Blocking, stripping, and similar concealed member in contact with masonry or concrete.
B. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground with water-borne preservatives forground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22. Complete fabrication of treated items
DIVISION 06 CARPENTRY
SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY (CONTINUED)
061000-3Project No. 16-20
prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavybrush coat of same chemical used for treatment. Inspect piece of treated lumber/plywoodafter drying; discard damaged/defective pieces.
C. All fasteners used with pressure treated wood to be hot dipped galvanized ring-shanknails or screws.
2.11 Adhesives:By Contech, or approved equal.A. Interior: PL400, heavy duty sub-floor adhesive.B. Exterior: PL500, deck and treated lumber adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation:A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work and units which
are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum jointarrangement.
B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels/lines, with members plumb/true andaccurately cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and asrequired by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry workand fill holes.
D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated; finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will beexposed to view or receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members;install fasteners without splitting wood; pre-drill as required.
3.02 Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking, and Sleepers:A. Provide wherever shown and where required fo screeding or attachment of other work.
Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to beattached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nutsflush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation ofmasonry work. Anchor to form work before concrete placement.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed/preservative treated/key-beveled lumber not lessthan 1.1/2" wide, thickness required to bring face to exact thickness of finish materialinvolved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.03 Installation of Plywood:A. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 304, “APA
Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial”, for types of plywood productsand applications indicated.
B. Nail plywood backing panels to supports.C. Install with face panels perpendicular to supports.D. Stagger end joints.E. Apply a 3/8 inch bead of sub-floor adhesive to all structural members prior to installing
sheathing.F. Use nails, 8d ring shank, 6 inches on centers at edges, 12 inches on center at
intermediate supports.G. All end joints must occur over supports.H. Maintain minimum 1/32 inch gap at all joints.I. Avoid deflection between supports prior to nailing.
End of Section
062200-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 06 CARPENTRY
SECTION 062200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description of work to be included:A. Miscellaneous wood trim.B. Countertops and wall caps.C. Plastic laminate.
1.02 Related sections:Laminate Clad Casework (Section 123000)
1.03 Quality standards:A. All items in compliance with ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE
STANDARDS, premium or custom grade as noted.B. Mark each unit of architectural woodwork with mill’s/fabricator’s identification and grade
mark, located on surfaces which will not be exposed after installation.1.04 Shop drawings:
Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans/elevations, large scaledetails, attachment devices and other components for casework and shelving.
1.05 Product delivery, storage, and handling:A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting/wet work/grinding/similar operations which could
damage/soil/deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas.C. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.1.06 Job conditions:
Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature/humidity requirements for woodwork installationareas. Do not install woodwork until required temperature/relative humidity have been stabilizedand will be maintained in installation areas
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Basic materials and fabrication methods:Unless otherwise indicated, comply with following requirements for architectural woodwork notspecifically indicated as prefabricated or prefinished standard products.A. Wood moisture content:
Provide kiln-dried lumber with average content range of 9%-13% for interior work. Maintain temperature/relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operationsso that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% -10% for mild regions as defined by AWI for interior wood finish.
B. Plastic laminate tops:Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate plastic laminate tops (installed on othercasework as indicated) to comply with requirements for casework with plastic laminatefinish. Grade to be premium.
C. Quality Standards:For the following types of architectural woodwork comply with indicated standards asapplicable:1. Standing and running trim: AWI Section 300.2. Casework and countertops: AWI Section 400.3. Miscellaneous work: AWI Section 700.
D. Design and construction features:
DIVISION 06. CARPENTRY
SECTION 062200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK (CONTINUED)
062200-2Project No. 16-20
1. Comply with details shown for profile/construction of architectural woodwork or tomatch existing work if replicating existing details; and, where not otherwise,comply with applicable Quality Standards, with alternate details as Fabricator’soption.
2. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished corestock surfaces, even on concealed surfaces, will not be permitted.
E. Pre-cut openings:Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receivehardware/appliances/plumbing fixtures/electrical work/similar items. Locate openingsaccurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size/shape. Smoothedges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges ofcutouts with a water-resistant coating. Provide plastic or rubber grommets at all wiringcutouts.
F. Measurements:Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction,obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required foraccurate fit.
2.02 Interior architectural woodwork, standing and running trim:Custom grade; stile and rail construction, fabricate standing /running trim including jambs todimensions/profiles/details shown. Route or groove reverse side of trim members to be applied toflat surface, except for members with ends exposed in finish work.
2.03 Preparation for architectural woodwork:Back priming of wood trim/architectural woodwork is specified as work of this section. Refer toDivision 9 for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. All surfaces to be concealed ontrim/mouldings/soffits shall be backprimed prior to installation.
2.04 Preparations for finishing:Comply with AWI Quality Standards, Section 1500, for sanding/filling countersunk fasteners/backpriming/similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork applicable to each unit of work.
2.05 Core materials:A. Particleboard:
1. Medium density, 45-50 pound industrial grade particleboard of fir or pine meetingor exceeding ANSI A208.1, latest edition.
2. Thickness as noted on the drawings.B. Hardboard:
Meet or exceed commercial standards CS-251.C. Plywood:
1. Grade A/C, exposure 1.2. Thickness as noted on the drawings.3. Use at counter tops and as detailed on the drawings.
D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, core thicknesses to be minimum 3/4" thickparticleboard.
E. Exterior veneers:1. Faces (front, sides, and exposed rear sections):
A. GP28 high pressure decorative laminate.B. Manufacturer, color, and texture to generally match millwork currently in
the space.2. Countertops:
A. GP50 (.050) high pressure decorative laminate with BK20 backer
DIVISION 06. CARPENTRY
SECTION 062200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK (CONTINUED)
062200-3Project No. 16-20
underside.B. Manufacturer, color and texture to generally match millwork currently in
the space.3. Interior finish (where not openly exposed):
A. Gray, white, or black thermally fused melamine laminate (Owner’schoice).
B. Tested to meet NEMA Test LD-3, latest edition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.01 Preparation:Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior toinstalling. Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion. Complete work asrequired including back priming/removal of packing.
3.02 Installation:Install work plumb/level/true/straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops); and with 1/16"maximum offset in flush adjoining surface, 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. Scribe/cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
3.03 Standard and running trim:A. Install with minimum number joints possible using full-length pieces (from maximum
length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible; stagger joints in adjacent/relatedmembers/ cope at returns, miter at corners, comply with Quality Standards for joinery.
B. Anchor woodwork to anchors/blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates; secure togrounds/stripping /blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailingrequired for complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners headsare required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush withwoodwork.
3.04 Countertops:Anchor securely to base units/other support systems as indicated.
3.05 Adjustment, cleaning, finishing and protection:A. Repair damaged/defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; if not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniformappearance.
B. Clean hardware/lubricate/make final adjustments for proper operation. Clean woodworkon exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restoredamaged or soiled areas. Refer to Division 9 for final finishing.
C. Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise Contractor of final protection andmaintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage/deteriorationat time of acceptance.
End of Section
062530-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 06. CARPENTRY
SECTION 062530 SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Summary:A. Section Includes:
T-Grooved wood composite 3/4" (19mm) thick panels, pre-engineered and machined foruse with groove inserts and retail display hardware.1. Attachment System.
Metal frames having attachment clips for installation direct to metal stud or metalfurring strips over gypsum drywall.
2. Panels:High Pressure Laminate adhered to wood fiber substrate and having a balancingbacker sheet.
B. Products not included or installed under this section:1. Display fixtures, hooks, or bracket arms.2. Gypsum board backup.
1.03 References:A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications (ASTM)
1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials.
B. Architectural Woodwork Standards as published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute,the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, and the WoodworkInstitute.1. Architectural Woodwork Standards - (Latest Edition).
1.04 Shop drawings and submittals:A. Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these
specifications, including:1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling and trimmembers with respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation.
C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color and pattern selection samplesrepresenting manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.Provide samples of edge trim as applicable.
D. Include the following when vinyl grove inserts are specified.1. Provide samples for groove insert selection as applicable.
E. Samples for Verification:Submit sample for each component and for each exposed finish required, prepared onsamples of size indicated below complete with exposed molding and trim samples. Sample to indicate type, finish, and color specified.1. Laminate and printed finishes: Submit 6" (154mm) by 10" (254mm) section of
panel for each panel selected indicating the color, texture, and pattern required.A. Submit complete with specified applied finish.B. For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat.
2. Painted finishes: Submit 6" (154mm) by 10" (254mm) samples of each type andcolor.
DIVISION 06. CARPENTRY
SECTION 062530 SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS (CONTINUED)
062530-2Project No. 16-20
F. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for panels, adhesives prior to theirdelivery to the site.
G. Maintenance Instructions.1.05 Quality Assurance:
A. Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spreadrequirements as tested in accordance with: 1. ASTM E 84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building
Materials) 2. Required Rating – Class A.
1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling:A. Deliver panels and associated materials factory packaged on strong pallets and properly
packaged or protected.1. Upon delivery carefully inspect all cartons, packages, pallets and protective wrap
for damage or material shortage.2. Open and inspect suspect packages, cartons or wrapped pallets for damage.3. Contact shipper immediately to report any damaged or missing materials.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.1. Maintain plastic or other protective wrap in place during on site handling until
ready for installation.2. Keep panels clean and do not stack panels after removal of protection.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-basedmaterials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 Project Conditions:A. Wood composite panels are subject to the effects of humidity and temperature. Do not
use in kitchens, rest rooms, or other high humidity areas.B. Partition walls are to be finished and the building completely closed. Walls shall be
thoroughly dry and concrete cured and dry before starting installation.C. HVAC system must be operable and installation area must be balanced to normal
operating conditions.D. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. To ensure product performance, atemperature range of 60°-80°F (16°C-27°C) and a humidity range of 35-55% must bemaintained during storage, installation and product life cycle. Do not install productsunder environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 Coordination and Sequencing:A. Except as specified by the architect, it's recommended to locate trim members so that
panel lines coordinate with doors, headers, jambs and other discontinuities in a wall.B. Vapor barrier shall be used on exterior walls behind backing to discourage warping.
1.09 Warranty:A. Standard Warranty:
All products shall be warranted to be free from defects for a period of 30 days afterinstallation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Slatwall Panels:Commercial wood composite panels with engineered grooves for merchandise displays.
2.02 A. Panel Configuration:Engineered groove machined into wood composite substrate.
DIVISION 06. CARPENTRY
SECTION 062530 SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS (CONTINUED)
062530-3Project No. 16-20
1. Panel thickness – 3/4" (19mm) thick with nominal1/2" (13mm) deep slotted grove.2. Panel face dimensions:
48" (1.22m) by [96" (2.44m).3. Slatwall panels grooves machined on [3" (76mm)][6" (15mm)][12" (30mm)]
centers.B. Standard Slatwall, NAF:
Medium density wood fiberboard conforming to ANSI A208.2, industrial-grade MDF andhaving No-Added Formaldehyde (NAF).
2.03 Panel Finish:A. High Pressure Laminate:
Vertical grade 0 .030" (0.762mm) thick high pressure plastic laminate adhered to woodfiber substrate by cold pressing polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type II, water resistant adhesives.1. Finish: Light maple pattern - to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard selection.B. Groove Treatment:
Furnish with factory installed plastic channel inserts and PVC end caps, color to beselected.
C. Panel Trim:1. Outside/Inside Corner – 1-3/8" x 1-3/8" x 8'- 0" (2.4m) aluminum, finish to be
selected.2. Edge – 1/2" x 3 4" x 8'- 0" (2.4m) aluminum mill finish.
2.04 Installation Accessories:A. Phillips, bugle head, coarse threaded screws.B. Manufacturer’s Rail Assembly: Combination of Mounting Track and Panel Bar
1. Steel prefinished at the factory. Silver Powder Coat2. Edge – Gray
C. Adhesives:Heavy Duty solvent based adhesive as approved for use by the manufacturer.
2.05 Fabrication:A. All framing, panels, hardware and accessories shall be factory finished and ready to
install except for field fabrication required by perimeter and corner conditions.B. Refinish field cut panel edges in accordance with manufacturer's instruction before
installation.C. Fabrication Tolerances for panels:
1. Dimensional: ± 0.0625".2. Square: ± 0.125" across diagonals.3. Thickness: ± 0.008".4. Grooving:: ± 0.031" (groove width and spacing between grooves).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Examination:A. Installer's Examination: Examine conditions under which construction activities of this
section are to be performed. Submit written notification to Architect and systemmanufacturer if such conditions are unacceptable. Beginning erection constitutesinstaller's acceptance of conditions.1. Verify that a vapor barrier has been provided on exterior walls behind backing to
prevent warping.2. Verify backing panels are smooth, solid, and flat. All drywall joints are to be taped
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS (CONTINUED)
062530-4Project No. 16-20
and finished.3. Verify that walls are primed before installation begins.4. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building service and/or items affecting work of
this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 5. Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24" (600mm) on-center.
B. Structural walls are to be finished, with building completely closed. Walls shall bethoroughly dry before starting installation.
3.02 Preparation:A. Conditioning: Panels must be allowed to acclimate to a balanced environment in the
installation location for 72 hours prior to installation. B. Protect existing surfaces with drop cloths.C. Except as directed by the architectural drawings, before installing, examine panels and
arrange to achieve best combination of color, pattern, texture and grain.3.03 Installation:
A. Install all materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructionswith hardware straight, plumb, and level.1. Anchor units rigidly and securely in place.2. Cut sheets to meet existing supports.
B. Fasten initial bottom panel to the wall with #6 or #7 bugle head drywall screws. Install aminimum of one screw every third slot (or 9" (228mm)) vertically and every studhorizontally, typically every 16" (40.64cm) on centers horizontally (maximum 24" (600mm)on centers horizontally). Each 4' x 8' panel shall have minimum of 42 screws secured tostuds or furring.1. Where screws do not hit the studs, fasten with adhesive in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.2. Screws must be installed thru the panel grooves.3. Slatwall panels without inserts do not require pre-drilling.4. Slatwall panels with inserts require 5/32" pre-drilling of holes thru the insert and
panel before fastening.C. Avoid contamination of the panel faces with adhesives, solvents or cleaners during
installation.3.04 Cleaning and Protection:
A. Clean and remove dust and other foreign matter from panel and framing surfaces. Cleanfinishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
End of Section
072116-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 072116 FIBERGLASS INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:Fiberglass sound attenuation batt and roll insulation.
1.02 References:A. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.B. ASTM C 553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.C. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.D. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.E. ASTM C 764 - Standard. Specification for Mineral Fiber. Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation.F. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.G. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.H. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.I. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace
at 750 Degrees C.J. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.K. Federal Specification HH-I-521F: Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, For
Ambient Temperatures).L. Federal Specification HH-I-558B: Insulation, Blocks, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and
Tube Covering), and Pipe fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type)M. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Life Safety CodeN. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL 2079 Standard test method for fire resistance of
Building Joint Systems.1.03 Submittals:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.
C. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.1.04 Quality Assurance:
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experiencemanufacturing products in this section shall provide all products listed.
B. Installer Qualifications: Products listed in this section shall be installed by a singleorganization with at least five years experience successfully installing insulation onprojects of similar type and scope as specified in this section.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques andapplication workmanship.1. Finish areas designated by Architect.2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect.3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 072116 FIBERGLASS INSULATION (CONTINUED)
072116-2Project No. 16-20
name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.B. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.C. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.
1.06 Sequencing:A. Coordinate with the installation of vapor retarders and air seal materials if specified in
other sections.B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.1.07 Project Conditions:
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmentalconditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 As manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, Manville Building Products Group,Certainteed Corporation, or approved equal.
2.02 Applications:A. All locations as shown on the drawings.
2.03 Thermal Batt Insulation:A. Fiber glass building insulation for walls, ceilings, attics and floors.B. To comply with ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt insulation:
2.04 High-Density Thermal Insulation:High-Performance Fiber Glass Building Insulation. Fiber glass building insulation for walls,ceilings, attics and floors. Complies with ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt insulation:A. Facing: ASTM C 665 Type I Unfaced.
1. Fire Hazard Classification: ASTM E 84:A. Maximum Flame Spread Index; 25.B. Maximum Smoke Developed Index; 50.
2. Noncombustibility: ASTM E 136, passes.B. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R-13 for 3.1/2":
1. Thickness: as noted on the draiwngs.2. One of the following:
3.01 Examination:A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that all exterior and interior wall, partition, and floor/ceiling assembly construction
has been completed to the point where the insulation may correctly be installed.C. Verify that mechanical and electrical services in ceilings, walls and floors have been
installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready toreceive insulation.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 072116 FIBERGLASS INSULATION (CONTINUED)
072116-3Project No. 16-20
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.3.02 Preparation:
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 Installation:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within plane of insulation.E. If vapor barrier or facer is specified, install insulation with vapor barrier installed facing the
warm side. Seal or tape joints as required.3.04 Protection:
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
End of Section
079200-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 079200 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 At areas of new work.1.02 Interior:
A. Joints at dissimilar materials.B. Door frames.C. General use.D. Where noted on drawings.
1.03 Other caulking to make building watertight in areas of renovation.1.04 Submittals:
Furnish manufacturer's specifications / recommendations / installation instructions for each typematerial required. Include manufacturer's published data, letter of certification, or certified testlaboratory report indicating each material complies with requirements and intended generally forapplications shown.
1.05 Warranty:Furnish a written warranties as specified below, covering loss of adhesion or cohesion,deterioration, leaking, and other defects. In addition, warrant that material has been installedaccording to manufacturer's written specifications.Prior to the start of work, the Manufacturer shall provide a full-time employee to verify thatmaterials are suitable for intended applications, will provide long-term adhesion, and arecompatible when dissimilar materials intersect or contact one another. No claims for additionalcosts shall be allowed because of changes of sealants required to comply with the provisions ofthis paragraph.A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shallbe in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor underrequirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replaceelastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirementsspecified in this Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two yearsfrom date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufactureragreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not complywith performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specifiedwarranty period. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric jointsealants from the following:1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compressioncaused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding designspecifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 All items:A. Oakum joint filler:
1. Untreated hemp or jute fiber rope, free of oil / tar / and / or other compounds
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 079200 CAULKING AND SEALANTS (CONTINUED)
079200-2Project No. 16-20
which might stain surfaces, contaminate joint walls, or not be compatible withsealants.
2. Hand packed, dry spun.B. Sealant backer rod:
Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam,butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam, or other flexible / permanent / durable / non-absorptivematerial recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant manufacturer.
C. Joint primer / sealer:Provide type of joint primer / sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for thejoint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
2.02 General use at non-paintable surfaces:A. Silicone Sealant Compound:
1. Compound shall be a single-component, silicone-based sealant. Cured sealantshall have the following physical properties:
2. Sealant shall meet or exceed all requirements of MIL-S-8802 andFS-TT-S-001543A.
3. One of the following:A. "Dow Corning 795" as manufactured by Dow Corning Corp., Midland MI
48640.B. "Silpruf 2000" as manufactured by General Electric Construction
Products.C. “Pecora 864" as manufactured by PecoraD. “CRL 95C” as manufactured by CR Lawrence
4. Color shall be as approved by Designers and Owner.2.03 General interior use, non-elastomeric sealants, paintable - use at door frames etc.:
Acrylic Emulsion Sealant:Acrylic emulsion or latex rubber modified acrylic emulsion sealant compound; permanentlyflexible, non-staining / non-bleeding; recommended by manufacturer for general interior exposureand capable of being painted. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirementsinclude:
Sonolac by Contect-SonnebornDAP Acrylic Latex caulk by DAP, Inc.Easaply by W.R. Meadows, Inc.AC-20 Acrylic Latex by PecoraSikaflex 420 by Sika ChemicalAcrylic Latex Caulk by Tremco, Inc.
DIVISION 07. MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 079200 CAULKING AND SEALANTS (CONTINUED)
079200-3Project No. 16-20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation:A. Clean surfaces to be caulked, free from mortar and other foreign matter.B. Allow surfaces to dry before caulking.C. Fill surfaces deeper than 3/4 inch with oakum or compressible backer rod for elastomeric
sealants, packed tight.D. Force compound into joints and recessed with gun having nozzle of proper size and at
sufficient pressure to fill joints to depths shown; if not shown, as recommended by sealantmanufacturer but within following general limitations, measured at center of bead:1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to
traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but never more than 1/2inch deep not less than 1/4 inch deep.
E. Form concave joints, slightly behind adjoining materials, unless otherwise shown, socompressed units will not protrude from joint.
F. Remove excess material.G. Remove stains and soil from other work caused by this work.H. Color selected by architect from a list of manufacturer’s full range of colors.
End of Section
081100-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 081100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section IncludesA. Steel door frames.B. Shop paint.C. Shop drawings.
1.02 Related SectionsA. Hardware (Section 087000).B. Hardware Templates (Section 087000).
1.03 Shop DrawingsA. Metal frames.B. Note primer formulation.C. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GeneralProvide standard steel doors / frames by a single firm specializing in production of this type ofwork.
2.02 Steel Door FramesA. As manufactured by Amweld Building Products Division, Republic Builders Products,
Steelcraft Manufacturing, Fenestra, Ceco Corporation, or approved equal.B. Steel door frames to comply with SDI Recommended Specifications:
Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100) and as herein specified.C. Double rabbet.D. Construction:
2. Galvannealed at exterior installations.E. Sizes as indicated on drawings.F. Fabrication:
1. Welded construction: unit welds conforming to AWS.2. Knock-down frames may be used for single door frames with prior approval.
G. Joints mitered and welds ground smooth.H. Fill hairline joints with mineral filler.I. Reinforcement:
1. 1/8 Inch for surface applied hardware.2. 3/16 Inch thick for butts, 3 each frame.3. Other, 12 gauge.
J. Drill and tap to receive all mortise hardware.K. Cover all mortised areas with 26 gauge material.L. Anchor at bottom of each jamb to secure to floor.M. Jamb anchors:
1. Masonry anchors:Loose tee.
2. Existing masonry walls:Existing wall anchor, 18 gauge steel, to add support for bolting the frame into therough opening of an existing wall.
3. Drywall partitions:Lock-in 18 gauge steel.
4. Minimum 3 per jamb, more if noted on drawings.N. Three rubber door silencers each door.O. Steel spreader, base each frame.P. Clean thoroughly of oil, grease and other impurities, protecting with bonderite coating.Q. Shop coat inside and out of gray zinc chromate rust inhibiting baked prime coat.
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 081100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES (CONTINUED)
081100-2Project No. 16-20
R. Fire label requirements:1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
A. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.B. NFPA 252 Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):A. UL 10B Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.B. UL 10C-1998 Neutral Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies (positive
pressure rating required at vertical shaft enclosures).C. Directory of Certification Listings for Fire Doors.
3. ASTM International:1. ASTM E152 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,
Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted SwingingDoor Assemblies (for doors at vertical shaft enclosures).
4. Refer to drawings for specific U.L. fire label requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation.A. Erect plumb and true.B Anchor securely at floor, jamb and head.C. To maintain alignment provide spacer at intermediate point during construction of walls
and partitions.D. Templates will be furnished by finished hardware division, when written request is
received.E. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
End of Section
081400-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 081400 WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Wood doors.B. Wood plank doors at sliding track in Sustainability Office.C. Shop drawings and submittals.
1.02 Related sections:A. Finished Hardware (Section 087100).B. Glass and Glazing (Section 088100).
1.03 Shop drawings and submittals:A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.B. Submit manufacturers literature showing details of core and edge construction, trim for
lite openings and louvers if applicable.C. Furnish maintenance and care instructions for decorative laminate doors.D. Door warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Wood core doors:A. Standard thickness, kiln and plate dried, good grade, rotary cut birch without mineral
streaks, tapeless spliced, pairs matched.B. Crossbands: 1/16 inch hardwood, tapeless spliced, full to four edges with no defects or
voids.C. Core:
1. Single panel thickness or 3 ply particle board.2. Inner particle core with minimum resin content of 7% and minimum density of 25
pounds per cubic foot, modulus of rupture of 1500 psi.3. Outer plys with minimum resin content of 14% and minimum density of 47 pounds
per cubic foot.D. Edgebands:
1. Top and bottom rails 1.1/2 Inches wide, built up kiln dried laminated hardwoods.2. Stiles: 1.3/8 Inches thick after trimming outer strip to receive veneer to match
face, built up of laminated hardwoods.E. Glass openings:
1. Provide metal glass kits.2. Glass:
See drawings for glazing requirements.F. Manufacturer’s warranty:
1. Doors will be of good material and workmanship and will free of defects whichwould make them unserviceable or unfit for ordinary and recommended use.
2. Manufacturer’s limited warranty to be valid for the life of the installation againstany defects which shall make them unsuitable for the use for which they areintended.
3. Doors must be inspected when received and before they are hung or fitted. Ifdefects are noticed in any door, the door manufacturer must be notified in writingwithin 30 days of the date the door is received describing the defect.
4. If a defect could not be discovered until after the door is hung or fitted, the doormanufacturer must be notified in writing within one year of the date the door wasshipped from the factory describing the defect.
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS (CONTINUED)
081400-2Project No. 16-20
5. If any door is found to contain defects as stated herein during the warranty period,the manufacturer will do one of the following:A. Repair the defect;B. Furnish a replacement door, provided that the original door is returned to
the factory; orC. Refund the amount paid for the original door after receipt at the door at
the factory.D. Shipping costs to be at the manufacturer’s or contractor’s expense.
6. Guarantee to be furnished after installation has been made by the contractor andan inspection by a representative of the door manufacturer.
2.02 Wood plank doors:A. Basis of design: Rustic alder plank doors, as manufactured by Real Sliding
B. Constructed of ready to assemble pieces, unfinished, pre-cut and notched boards.C. 1.3/4" thickness.D. To be assembled with antiqued flat head screws, manufacturer supplied.E. Bottom slot in door for T-Guide sliding track.F. Shipped natural for field finishing.G. Refer to drawings for size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Comply with AWI Quality Standards.3.02 Protect doors from damage before and after installation.3.03 Allow doors to become acclimated to building heat and humidity before installation.3.04 Do not install doors in frames that are set out of plumb.3.05 Installation:
A. Trim to leave equal width stiles and headrail.B. Fit snugly without binding and with equal clearance around door with frame.C. Make hardware cuts and glazing cutouts neat and true.D. Immediately after hanging, remove and prime top and bottom edges.
End of Section
083300-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 083300 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Roll-up counter shutter.B. Shop drawings.C. Installation.
1.02 Submittals:A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of rollingcounter door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project.
B. Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations,details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Includerelationship with adjacent materials.
1.03 Quality Assurance:A. Manufacturer:
Rolling counter doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five yearsexperience in the fabrication and installation of rolling counter doors. Manufacturersproposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence ofability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list offive projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years.
B. Installer:Installation of rolling counter doors shall be performed by an authorized representative ofthe manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility:Provide doors, guides, motors, and related primary components from one manufacturerfor each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable tomanufacturer of primary components.
D. Pre-Installation Conference:Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of fieldoperations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and tocoordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
1.04 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strictcompliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage fromweather, excessive temperatures and construction operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Approved manufacturers:As manufactured by Overhead Door Company; Raynor Rolling Doors; The Cookson Company;Cornell Storefront Systems, or approved equal.
2.02 Equal to Overhead Door 652 Series Counter Doors by Overhead Door Corporation.2.03 Construction:
A. Curtain:Interlocking slats, Type FE-138 fabricated of anodized aluminum. Endlocks attached toalternate slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement.
B. Finish:1. PowderGuard Weathered Finish: Industrial textured powder coat provides a
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 083300 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES (CONTINUED)
083300-2Project No. 16-20
thicker, more scratch resistant coat. Applied to guides and head plate. Color tobe selected.
2. Bottom bar and slats to be clear anodized aluminum.C. Bottom Bar:
Extruded aluminum tubular shape with astragal.D. Guides:
Extruded aluminum.1. Finish: PowderGuard Weathered finish with iron/black powder.2. Finish: PowderGuard Zinc Finish for guides, bottom bar and head plate.
E. Brackets:Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.
F. Counterbalance:Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel.
G. Hood:Provided with intermediate support brackets as required and fabricated of aluminum.
H. Manual Operation:1. Manual push up.2. Push-up operated doors shall open and close with a maximum of 30 pounds of
effort utilizing finger lifts in the bottom bar.3. Provide pull-down pole for access above counter.
I. Locking:The push-up doors shall be secured by means of a concealed sliding bolt deadlock in thebottom bar operated by a thumb turn.
J. Wall Mounting Condition:Face-of-wall mounting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Preparation:Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions underwhich this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions arecorrected.
3.02 Installation:A. Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow formaintenance.
B. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning:
A. Test rolling counter doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide properoperation without binding or distortion.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposedsurfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer ofmaterial or product being cleaned.
End of Section
087000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 087000 FINISHED HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Furnishing and installation of finished hardware for complete and proper operation of new doorsshown on the plans.
1.02 Shop drawing submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.01 The trade names, catalog numbers, etc., mentioned herewith is intended to establish a generalquality standard and are not restricted to same. Equals will be considered if not specifically notedotherwise and if prior approval is received from the Architect and substituted materials arecompatible with materials specified.
2.02 Hardware supplier must be experienced in educational installations and have an organizationconsisting of members of the American Society of Architectural Hardware consultant (A.H.C.). Atleast one employee with A.H.C. Membership must be available locally at all times for consultationand service.
2.03 The following hardware schedule numbers are taken from catalogs of Stanley, Corbin/ Russwin,Von Duprin, Norton, Rockwood, National Guard, and Glynn Johnson.
2.04. Manufacturers' references:AR Adams Rite MC McKinneyAS American Specialties ME Mohawk EngravingB Baldwin McK McKinneyBE Best NR NortonBK Bobrick NGP National GuardBO Bommer P PemkoBR Bradley PR Precision HardwareCR Corbin Russwin RI RixsonD Detex RK RockwoodFA Folger Adam RSH Real Sliding HardwareFC Falcon SC SchlageSCE Security Technologies / Locknetics G GrantSA Sargent GJ Glynn - JohnsonSI Simplex HA HagerST Stanley I IvesT Telkee LCN LCN ClosersVD Von Duprin Y YaleX By Others
Note: The references noted above are included as an abbreviation schedule for items that maybe specified in Section 1.06, of the following Hardware Schedule. Items bymanufacturer’s not specifically listed by name or model number in the Hardware Scheduleare not to be considered equal to what has been specified unless approved in writing.
Door #106.1 Commons Area to Business Center 106 LHR3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1.3/4" Existing WD x Existing HM
each to have:CR 1.0 Ea. Storeroom Lockset ML2057 626
(Replace existing mortise lockset for exit only function)LCN 1.0 Ea. Closer 4042 EDA 689GJ 3.0 Ea. Silencers GJ64 GreyRoppe 1.0 Ea. Rubber Flooring Trans. Strip #65 150 Dark Gray
HEADING #2
Door #106.2 Commons Area to Business Center 106 RHR3'-0" x 7'-2" x 1.3/4" Existing WD x Existing HM
each to have:GJ 2.0 Ea. Silencers GJ64 GreyRoppe 1.0 Ea. Rubber Flooring Trans. Strip #65 150 Dark GraySCE 1.0 Ea. Door Position Switch 679-05 AL
(Intellikey system to be furnished and installed by the University Locksmith at this location, coordinaterough-in wiring requirements prior to installation of the door and frame.)
HEADING #3
Door #104.2 Post Office Retail 104 to Business Center 106 DBL ACTINGGATE
3'-0" x 2'-8" x 1.3/4" WD
each to have:BO 1.0 Ea. Set Spring Surface Pivot Hinge 7112 Steel
HEADING #4
Door #108.1 Exterior to Post Office 108 RHR
(University locksmith to repair and reactivate existing Intellikey system at this location.)
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 087000 FINISHED HARDWARE (CONTINUED)
087000-3Project No. 16-20
HEADING #5
Door #108D.1 Post Office 108 to Office 108D LH3'-0" x 7'-2" x 1.3/4" WD x HM
each to have:HA 3.0 Ea. Butts BB1279 4.1/2 x 4.1/2 NRP US26DCR 1.0 Ea. Office Lockset ML2051 59C1 6 pin keyway US26DRK 1.0 Ea. Kickplate 8 x 34 US32DGJ 2.0 Ea. Silencers GJ64 GreyNGP 1.0 Ea. Carpet Edge 417 Alum
HEADING #6
Door #108F.1 Commons Area to Open Workspace 108F RHR3'-0" x 7'-2" x 1.3/4" WD x HM
each to have:HA 3.0 Ea. Butts BB1279 4.1/2 x 4.1/2 NRP US26DCR 1.0 Ea. Office Lockset ML2051 59C1 6 pin keyway US26DRK 1.0 Ea. Kickplate 8 x 34 US32DGJ 2.0 Ea. Silencers GJ64 Grey
HEADING #7
Doors #108F.2 Open Workspace 108F to Office Area 108G(4) 2'-2" x 7'-2" x 1.3/4" WD Sliding Doors
2.07 Keying:1. All locks and cylinders are to be keyed by the University of North Carolina at Greensboro
staff.2. Existing keyway in use in this building to be used in keying any new locks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Package each item separately in individual containers, complete with screws, instructions andinstallation templates. Each container shall be identified with door number and item numbercorresponding with contractors hardware schedule.
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 087000 FINISHED HARDWARE (CONTINUED)
087000-4Project No. 16-20
3.02 Installation:A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, with all items
accurately fitted, securely applied and carefully adjusted.B. Upon completion of project and prior to final inspection, hardware supplier shall inspect
entire hardware installation and shall advise in writing of all items of hardware that requireadjustments for smooth, easy, proper operation.
3.03 Schedules:Submit complete schedule of finished hardware for approval by the Architect. Schedule each itemof hardware required for each door opening or item of equipment listing hardware item number,manufacturer, manufacturer's number or symbol, finish, and special instructions for installation.
3.04 Templates:Hardware for use with metal doors and frames shall be furnished to template and with metalscrews. Supply all necessary templates and template information to plastic laminate coveredwood door manufacturer, and metal door and frame manufacturers in ample time to prevent delayon the project.
End of Section
088100-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work included:A. Glass for:
1. Wood doors.2. Hollow metal frames.
B. Glazing tape, splines.C. Manufacturer approved sealant, compatible with other glazing materials.D. Cleaning.
1.02 Related Sections:Hollow Metal Doors & Frames (Section 08110).
1.03 References:A. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.B. ASTM C162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass.E. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of
Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load.F. ASTM C1172-03 - Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.G. ASTM E330-02 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.H. ASTM E774-97 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.I. NFPA 80-06 - Fire Doors and Windows.J. Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC):
Certified Products Directory (Issued Semi-Annually).K. N.C. State Building Code, Volume 1.
1.04 System Description:A. Design Requirements:
Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, windloadsand impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabricationand installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.
B. Provide glass products in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in-serviceconditions per ASTM E1300.1. Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products is selected, so the
worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following:A. 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically or not over 15 degrees
from the vertical plane and under wind action.B. 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical
plane and under action of wind and/or snow.1.05 Submittals:
A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheet and glazing instructions.B. Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant
manufacturer, indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesionwith glazing sealant, as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.
C. Glazing Contractor shall provide test reports showing that the glass meets therequirements of any security test reports specified on drawings.
1.06 Labels:A. Temporary labels:
1. Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brandand glass type, quality and nominal thickness.
2. Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) labelrequirements.
3. Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by the Architect andOwner’s Representative.
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING (CONTINUED)
088100-2Project No. 16-20
B. Permanent labels:1. Locate in corner for each pane.2. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass Certification
Council) label requirements.A. Tempered glass.B. Laminated glass or have certificate for panes without permanent label.C. Organic coated glass.
1.07 Quality Assurance:A. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer tothese publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or referencedstandards.1. GANA Publications.2. AAMA Publications.
B. Safety glass products to comply with CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.C. Single-source fabrication responsibility: All glass fabricated for each type shall be
processed and supplied by a single fabricator.1.08 Delivery, Storage and Handling:
A. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for receiving, handling, storing and protectingglass & glazing materials.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containerswith identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmfulenvironmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended bythe manufacturer.
D. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage/deterioration tocoating on glass.
E. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply withinsulating glass fabricator's recommendations of venting and sealing.
1.09 Project / Site Conditions:A. Environmental Requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air temperature
below 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) is prohibited.B. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field measurements
with drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products.1.10 Warranty:
A. Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for tempered glass.B. Laminated glass units to remain laminated for 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers:Manufacturer is used in this section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricatedglass as defined in the referenced standards.A. Oldcastle Glass.B. Guardian Industries.C. Pilkington.D. PPG Industries.E. Visteon Float Glass.F. Approved Equal.
2.02 Glass:A. Clear Tempered Safety Glass.
1. ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.2. Thickness, 1/4 inch.
2.03 Glazing Products:A. General:
Select appropriate glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and other glazing materials of provencompatibility with other materials that they contact. These include glass products,
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING (CONTINUED)
088100-3Project No. 16-20
insulating glass unit seals and glazing channel substrates under installation and serviceconditions, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864:1. Channel shape; having 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2. Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.3. Block lengths: 50 mm (two inches) except 100 to 150 mm (four to six inches) for
insulating glass.4. Block width: Approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) less than the full width of the
rabbet.5. Block thickness: Minimum 4.8 mm (3/16 inch). Thickness sized for rabbet depth
as required.C. Spacers: ASTM C864:
1. Channel shape having a 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2. Flanges not less 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) thick and web 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.3. Lengths: One to 25 to 76 mm (one to three inches).4. Shore a hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.
D. Sealing Tapes:1. Semi-solid polymeric based material exhibiting pressure-sensitive adhesion and
withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging.2. Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing
application to prevent water infiltration.E. Spring Steel Spacer:
1. Spring steel spacers may be used in rabbets of steel windows and hollow metalframes with stops.
2. Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in channel or rabbetedsash with stops.
F. Glazing Sealants:1. ASTM C920, silicone neutral cure.2. Type S.3. Class 254. Grade NS.5. Shore A hardness of 25 to 30 Durometer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Examination:Site Verification and Conditions:A. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the glass.B. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.C. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed.D. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 Preparation:A. For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA-02 Sealant
Manual.B. Protection
Handle and store product according to manufacturers' recommendations.C. Surface Preparation
1. Clean and prepare glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass.2. Remove coatings and other harmful materials that will prevent glass and glazing
installation required to comply with performance criteria specified.3. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.4. Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to
receive the glazing.D. Shop fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings
to provide GANA recommended edge clearances.E. Verify that components used are compatible.
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING (CONTINUED)
088100-4Project No. 16-20
3.03 Installation:A. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets
and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated,including those in the "GANA Glazing Manual".
B. Install glass in prepared glazing channels and other framing members.C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.D. Provide bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and glazing material tolerances
recommended by GANA Glazing Manual.E. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.F. Distribute the weight of the glass unit along the edge rather than at the corner.G. Comply with manufacturer's and referenced industry recommendations on expansion
joints and anchors, accommodating thermal movement, glass openings, use of settingblocks, edge, face and bite clearances, use of glass spacers, edge blocks and installationof weep systems.
H. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation.I. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction
operations, such as weld spatter, fireproofing or plaster.J. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked or damaged in any way.
3.04 Cleaning:A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after
application, using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.B. Glass to be cleaned according to:
1. GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures forCleaning Architectural Glass Products.
2. GANA Glass Information Bulletin GANA TD-02-0402 - Heat-Treated GlassSurfaces Are Different.
C. Do not use scrapers or other metal tools to clean glass.
End of Section
088700-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 08. DOORS, WINDOWS, GLASS
SECTION 088700 PRIVACY CONTROL WINDOW FILM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes:Privacy control film applied to existing glass.
1.02 Submittals:A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323.B. Product Data:
Manufacturer’s data on products to be provided, showing physical properties andincluding installation instructions.
C. Test Data:Independent testing agency reports showing compliance with properties specified byreference to a test method.
Experienced in application of self-adhesive window films, with at least 10 yearsapplications of similar size and complexity, and approved by the manufacturer.
B. Mock-up:Before proceeding with the work, apply film to one window sash designated by theArchitect.1. Accepted mock-up will constitute standard for workmanship for remaining work.2. Accepted mock-up may remain.3. Remove and replace rejected work.
1.04 Warranty:Provide film manufacture’s 10-year warranty against failure of film, including change of color,peeling, bubbling, rippling, cracking, delamination, and demetalization; include cost of materialand labor for removal and reinstallation.
2.20 Materials:Privacy control film:A. Polyester film with translucent or frost white appearance to simulate white frosted glass.B. Safe for dual pane insulating glass.C. Ultraviolet rejected: 99%.D. Film thickness: Minimum 2 mils (0.05 mm).E. Color stability: Non-yellowing.F. Ignitability & fire resistance: ASTM E-84 Class A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation:A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.B. Install without bubbles, ripples, drips, dirt, cuts, tears, or gaps between film and frame.C. Clean newly installed film and window frames.D. Clean cleaning solutions, run-off cleaning water, and adhesive mounting solution from
adjacent surfaces.E. Where installed film could be damaged by subsequent construction work provide tape
warning strips or barricades to prevent contact.
End of Section
092000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 092000 METAL LATH, PLASTER, STUCCO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:Gypsum plaster for repair in locations of work this project.A. Metal lath and channels.B. Metal casing beads.C. Expansion joints.D. Gypsum plaster for use in patched areas.E. Sample:
Provide finished sample of plaster for approval of color and texture.1.02 Related sections:
Gypsum Dry Wall (Section 092900).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Metal Lath:Expanded from steel sheets, 3/8 inch ribbed, weighing not less than 3.4 pounds per square yard,galvanized.
2.02 Tie Wire:Galvanized, annealed, not less than Type 1, F.S. QQ-W-461E carbon steel.
2.04 Metal casing beads: National Gypsum #66, 24 gauge, galvanized, expanded.2.05 Expansion joint:
National Gypsum, #15, 26 gauge, galvanized.2.06 Water: Potable, free from substances affecting set of plaster.2.07 Gypsum plaster:
A. Scratch and brown coats:1. National Gypsum, gypsum plaster, ASTM C 28.2. Zonolite aggregate, ASTM C 35.
B. Finish:1. National Gypsum E-Z Soak Finish Lime, ASTM C 206, Type S.2. National Gypsum, Gauging Plaster, ASTM C 28.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Conform to specifications of:A. Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association.B. Contracting Plasters and Lathers International Association.C. American Standards Association.
3.02 Preparation:A. Protect work of others against damage or spoiling, repair or replace damaged work of
others.B. Provide minimum temperature of 55 degrees fahrenheit prior to, and during application
and until plaster is completely dry.C. Provide controlled ventilation, freely circulating, but preventing drying too rapidly before
plaster is set.D. Frozen plaster will be rejected.
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 092000 METAL LATH, PLASTER, STUCCO (CONTINUED)
092000-2Project No. 16-20
3.03. Metal lath:A. Secure 1.1/2 inch channels 3 feet on centers to steel structure with #9 wire.B. Secure 3/4 inch channels 24 inches on centers to main runners with 2 strands #16 wire.C. Secure lath to cross furring with 2 strands #16 wire at 6 inch intervals.D. Place long lath dimension across supports with rib against support.E. Lapping: Ends, one inch minimum, sides nest ribs.F. Secure lath to supports at 6 inch intervals.G. Tie side and end laps together with intervals between ties and support not exceeding 9
inches.H. Turn cut ends of lath ties back up thru lath.
3.04 Install casing beads at all vertical surfaces leaving 1/8 inch gap.3.05 Proportions:
A. Gypsum plaster:1. Scratch coat: 100 pounds neat gypsum plaster to 2 cubic feet of aggregate.2. Brown coat: 100 pounds neat gypsum plaster to 3 cubic feet of aggregate.3. Finish coat: 250 pounds lime to 150 pounds gauging plaster.
3.06 Mixing:A. Mix plaster thoroughly to a uniform color and consistency in clean mixing boxes or mixers.
Use no frozen, caked, lumpy, partial set or retempered materials.B. Clean boxes, mixers and tools free of set of hardened material before a new batch is
added.C. Mix and batch separately.D. Hand mixing: By placing plaster or cement in one end of box, thoroughly mixing to
uniform color, hoed into water at other end.E. Mechanical mixing: By placing approximate amount of water in mixer, add half of the
aggregate, mix to proper consistency with additional water if necessary.F. Mixing hydrated lime putty: Sift hydrated lime into sufficient water to produce a soft putty,
screen putty thru sieve to remove lumps, or similar method to produce smooth lump freeputty. Soak for 12 to 24 hours as recommended by manufacturer of lime.
3.07 Thickness of plaster:Thickness of original installation.
3.08 Plaster application:A. Scratch coat: Apply enough material with sufficient pressure to secure good full keys and
good bonding surface for subsequent coat.B. Brown coat: Apply fully just slack of grounds or finished surfaces, well rodded, floated
with angles true, straight, plumb and level. Leave rough.C. Trowel finish: After base coat is set dry on surface, apply putty coat, scratched in
thoroughly, well laid on, doubled back to a true even surface with a thickness of 1/16 inchto 1/8 inch. Trowel with water brushed on, to a smooth hard surface free from trowelmarks, cat faces and other blemishes.
D. Machine finish on portland cement.3.09 Pointing and patching:
A. Do all necessary pointing to provide good connections to work of other trades.B. Where patching is unavoidable, build up with lath and plaster coats as for new work.C. Cut and patch plaster for other trades at their expense if requirements for such work is
not given in advance.D. Replace damaged plaster at the expense of the trade causing such damage.
3.10 Protection:Protect all masonry and finished surfaces with kraft or building paper.
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 092000 METAL LATH, PLASTER, STUCCO (CONTINUED)
092000-3Project No. 16-20
3.11 Cleaning:A. Clean plaster from all control joints and from gap between vertical surfaces and casing
beads.B. Upon completion of work in a space, remove excess materials, droppings, debris,
scaffolds, tools, and leave space broom clean, unless otherwise agreed upon withGeneral Contractor.
1. USG, Gold Bond, Georgia-Pacific metal furring channels.2. USG, Gold Bond, Georgia-Pacific metal furring channel clips.
C. Hanger wire: Galvanized, 8 gauge.D. Tie wire: Galvanized, 18 gauge.
2.06 Joint treatments:A. Joint compound, perforated tape:B. To comply with ASTM C 475.C. Perforated or fiberglass tape.
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 092900 GYPSUM DRY WALL (CONTINUED)
092900-2Project No. 16-20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General:This installation to be in complete conformance with all recommendations of the approved drywallmanufacturer.
3.02 Gypsum board:A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C 840 and GA
216.B. Apply single layer gypsum board in most economical direction with ends and edges
occurring over firm bearing.C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board with edges and ends occurring over firm
bearing.D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted and ends occurring over
firm bearing.E. Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum first layer, placed perpendicular or parallel to
framing or furring members. Place second layer with offset joints from joints of first layer.F. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated on drawings.G. Locate joints at openings so no end joint will align with edges of opening.H. Screw attach gypsum board horizontally. Gypsum board shall be attached to steel studs
in accordance with ASTM Specification C-840, except that the steel drill screws used(Specification ASTM C-954) shall be spaced not more than 8 inches on center alongedges and ends, and not more than 12 inches on center in the field of the board.
I. Stagger all joints, horizontally and vertically, on opposite faces of partition 16 inchesminimum.
J. Where structural or mechanical systems penetrate wall system, tightly fill all voids andcracks with acoustical blanket material.
K. Place edges of boards in contact with each other but do not break surface.L. Provide for deflection of load bearing members above non-loadbearing partitions.M. Application of taping compound:
1. Prefill openings wider than 1/4" (6.4 mm).2. Dimple fasteners slightly below surface of wall board, but do not break surface.3. All dimples and other depressions to be filled with joint compound.4. Application of taping compound:
A. Completely fill the recess formed by the tapered edges of the panel withtaping compound.
B. Center joint tape and press into the taping compound by drawing theknife along the joint at a 45 degree angle.
C. Apply sufficient pressure to remove excess taping compound above, andat the edges of the joint tape.
D. Leave sufficient quantity of taping compound under the joint tape toensure an adequate bond, but not more than 1.32" (0.8 mm) at thefeathered edge.
E. As soon as joint tape has been embedded, apply a skim coat of tapingcompound over the joint tape and allow to dry completely.
5. Apply corner beads at all external corners, apply coat of taping compound.N. Apply casing beads at intersections of gypsum and masonry or concrete and other
dissimilar surfaces where gypsum wall board terminates without trim to cover. Placecorner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length.
O. Application of finishing compound:
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 092900 GYPSUM DRY WALL (CONTINUED)
092900-3Project No. 16-20
1. When taping compound has dried completely, apply additional coats of ready-mixfinishing compound until finish level is achieved.
2. Sand to smooth finish with 220 or 320 grit sand paper or screen cloth, smoothwith a damp sponge.
3.03 Suspension system:A Space 8 gauge hanger wires 48 inches on center along carrying channels and within 6
inches of ends of carrying channels. Anchor to structure with manufacturer approvedanchors or tie to structural support members.
B Install 1.1/2 inch channels 48 inches on center maximum, level and secure with hangerwire saddle-tied along channel. Provide 1 inch clearance at walls.
C At channel splices, interlock flanges; overlap ends 12 inches and secure with double-strand 18 gauge tie wire.
D At vertical channels, turn 90 degree angle at roof deck, minimum 6 inch leg, secure todeck or structural members with two approved fasteners.
E Where horizontal channels intersect vertical channels, secure together with thru-bolts.F Brace channels if required for secure installation.G Erect furring channels at right angles to 1.1/2 inch channels, maximum spacing 16 inches
on center interior, 12 inches on center exterior.H Secure furring channels to carrying channels with clips; at splices, nest minimum 8 inches
and wire tie each end with double strand 18 gauge tie wire.3.04 Finishing:
General: Comply with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and GA 216 as applicable for the following useareas:A. Level 1:
Plenums, service corridors; above ceilingsB. Level 2:
Areas of water resistant gypsum backing board under tile; exposed areas whereappearance is not critical.
C. Level 3:Areas to receive heavy or medium textured coatings; heavy-grade wall coverings.
D. Level 4:Areas to receive flat sheen paint finish; light textured coatings; lightweight wall coverings.
E. Level 5:Areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss sheen paints; critical lighting conditions (Typicalfinished areas).
End of Section
095100-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work included:A. Suspension system.B. Acoustical ceiling tile.
1.02 Samples:Provide samples and product literature of tile and ceiling grid for approval.
1.03 Related sections:Gypsum Dry Wall (SECTION 09250).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Exposed grid system:A. As manufactured by Chicago Metallic; Armstrong Ceiling Systems; Gordon Architectural
Aluminum Specialities, Inc.; or approved equal.B. Main runners, cross runners, wall molding.C. Ceiling Grid:
1. 15/16" white baked enamel finish on steel.2. Armstrong Prelude, or approved equal.3. Size to accommodate 24" x 24" lay-in panels
2.02 Acoustical Ceiling Tile:A. As manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal.B. Glacier #707.C. 24" x 24" panels.D. Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation by a factory approved applicator.3.02 Install in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions.3.03 Install under normal operating temperature and humidity conditions.3.04 Install systems to ceiling layout pattern as shown on drawings, or to permit border units of
greatest possible size.3.05 Check all members for horizontal and vertical alignment.3.06 Cleaning:
1. Clean soiled or discolored surfaces of units.2. Remove and replace damages or improperly installed units.
3.07 Leave one full package of each type tile on the job for the Owner.
End of Section
096510-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096510 VINYL BASE & TRANSITION STRIPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Vinyl base.B. Flooring adapters/transitions.C. Cleaning and polishing.
1.02 Referenced documents:A. ASTM International:
1. F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall base2. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials3. F 386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials
Having Flat Surfaces4. E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring systems Using
a Radiant EnergySource.5. E 662 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.6. F 925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.7. F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with
Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus.8. F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Vinyl
Flooring by Color Change.B. Other Referenced Documents:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 255, Test Method for CriticalRadiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 258 Test Method for Specific Densityof Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
3. California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition65).
4. The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)1.03 Submittals:
A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification summary sheet for specified products.
C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specifiedperformance characteristics and physical properties.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation and maintenanceinstructions.
E. Submit the following:1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with
Division 1 sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, andprecautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes andperformance.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who hasspecialized in installing work similar to that required for this project.
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096510 VINYL BASE & TRANSITION STRIPS (CONTINUED)
096510-2Project No. 16-20
B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Fire Performance characteristics: Provide resilient sheet vinyl floor covering with
the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products inaccordance with ASTM method (and) NFPA method) indicated below by acertified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.A. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems: Class 1, > 1.0 W/cm2B. ASTM E 662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated
by Solid Materials: Passes, <450 c. ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255), Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials: Class C.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain resilient wall base andmanufacturer’s recommended adhesive from a single supplier.
D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verifyproject requirements, substrate Conditions & manufacturer’srecommended substrates and required preparation manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.Comply with requirements in Division 1.
1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 1.B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to
avoid construction delays.C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact.D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and acclimated to site conditions at temperature and humidity conditionsrecommended by manufacturer.
In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive resilient wallbase shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at auniform temperature of 65-85 degrees F for 48 hours prior too during, and thereafterinstallation of resilient wall base.
B. Resilient wall base and adhesive shall be conditioned in the same manner. Resilient wallbase must be unboxed & acclimated in area of use at least 48 hours prior to installation.Minimum temperature shall be a 65 degrees F after installation.
1.07 Sequencing and Scheduling:Finishing Operations: Install resilient wall base after finishing operations, including floor coveringpainting and ceiling operations etc., have been completed.
1.08 Warranty:A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's
standard warranty document.B. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may
have under Contract Documents.1. Warranty Period: 1 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial
Completion. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer withinthirty (30) days after buyer learns of the defect.
2. Limited Wear Warranty: 3 year limited wear warranty.1.09 Maintenance:
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096510 VINYL BASE & TRANSITION STRIPS (CONTINUED)
096510-3Project No. 16-20
A. Extra Materials:Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed.Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Complywith Division One Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of Resilient Wall Base equal to 5% of amount installed.2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery,
storage and protection of extra materials.B. Maintenance of finished floor covering to be conducted per Manufacturer’s Maintenance
equal.B. In compliance with ASTM F-1861 Type TV (Thermoplastic Vinyl).C. 4 inch high vinyl cove base with standard toe.D. Color to be selected.E. Ribbed back.F. .125 (1/8) inch thickness.G. Lengths: 120' coils.H. Furnish matching premolded inside and outside corners with 2.1/4 inch returns.
2.02 Flooring adapters/Transitions:A. New carpet / existing vinyl composition tile adjacencies at door locations where noted on
the drawings:1. Roppe #65 rubber rolling traffic transition 1/4" to 1/8".
B. Carpet and existing vinyl composition tile adjacencies to unfinished concrete surfaces atdoor locations where noted on the drawings:1. National Guard Products #417 carpet edge, aluminum mill finish.
2.03 Adhesives:A. Moisture resistant.B. As recommended by tile manufacturer for installation on concrete slab.
2.04 Caulking:Colored caulk, as supplied by vinyl base manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Manufacturer's Instructions:A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation.B. Commencement of work implies acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 Examination:A. Site Verification of Conditions:
Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for installing product in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.
B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visuallyinspect materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed.
3.03 Preparation:A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from
damage during product installation. B. Surface Preparation, General: Prepare substrate
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096510 VINYL BASE & TRANSITION STRIPS (CONTINUED)
096510-4Project No. 16-20
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Substrate: Prepare manufacturer’s recommended substrates to be smooth, rigid, flat,
level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as paint, dust, grease,oils, solvent, old adhesive residue, vinyl wall coverings, non-porous surfaces and allother contaminants that may interfere with adhesive bond.
3.04 Installing:A. Manufacturer’s instructions for specifications on installing resilient wall base.B. Resilient wall base colors, heights and profiles: As selected by Architect.
3.05 Field Quality Requirement:A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with minimum 72 hours notice,
provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations andperiodic site visits to confirm installing of product is in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.
3.06 Cleaning:Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from projectsite and legally dispose of debris.
End of Section
096800-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096800 MODULAR CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Modular carpet tile.B. Adhesive.C. Installation.D. Warranty.
1.02 Related sections:A. Vinyl Base (Section 096510 Vinyl Base and Transition Strips)B. Flooring Adapters/Transition Strips (Section 096510 Vinyl Base and Transition Strips)
1.03 Samples and submittals:Furnish layout diagrams and installation instructions.
1.04 Warranty:The Contractor warrants the installation of the carpet will be done according to carpetmanufacturer's instructions and following best means available for a first class installation byreputable and competent installation professionals. The Contractor agrees to replace, re-install,and make any adjustments necessary to keep the installation to the user's satisfaction, and at nocost to the Owner, for a period of two (2) years from the date of the installation acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Carpeting - Equal to the following, as approved by the Owner:A. By Shaw or Bigelow Commercial Carpet, or approved equal.B. Equal to Bigelow Accountable II Modular BT267, 24" x 24" modular carpet tile.C. Color to be selected or as indicated on the drawings.D. Installation Method: Quarter Turn.E. Construction: Tufted.F. Surface Appearance: Level Heathered Loop.G. Nylon Type: Colorstrand SD Nylon.H. Gauge: 1/8 (31.50 rows per 10 cm).I. Face Weight: 15.0 oz. Per sq. yd. (509 g/m2)J Finished Pile Thickness: .076" (1.93 mm).K. Stitches per Inch: 8.8 (34.65 per 10 cm.).L. Dye Method: Solution Dyed.M. Density: 7105.N. Weight Density: 106,579.O. Backing Material: EcoFlex ICT.P. Flammability: ASTM E648 Class 1 (Glue Down).Q. Smoke Density: ASTM E662 Less than 450.R. Static Propensity: AATCC-134 Under 3.5 KV.S. IAQ Green Label: 1098.T. CRI Rating: Severe Traffic
2.03 Adhesives:A. As recommended by manufacturer and formulated for installation of carpet or accessories
to applicable substrate.B. Non-staining and moisture resistant.
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 096800 MODULAR CARPETING (CONTINUED)
096800-2Project No. 16-20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Preparation of Sub-Floors:A. Carpet installer to inspect all floors to receive carpeting and inform the Contractor of
unsuitable sub-surfaces before commencing installation. Commencement of installationimplies acceptance of sub-surface.
B. Floors shall be cleaned to remove dust, dirt, solvent, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and othersubstances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of the finishedinstallation. Floors shall be allowed to dry thoroughly.
C. Immediately prior to the installation of carpet, all floor surfaces shall be thoroughlycleaned. The floor shall be wet mopped with warm water and allowed to dry thoroughly. After mopping, the floor shall be vacuumed with a commercial vacuum cleaner.
3.02 Carpet Installation:A. Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work is approved and completed.B. Install all carpeting to manufacturer's instructions for direct glue installation.C. In areas where carpeting does not cover entire room from wall to wall or at doorways
where carpeting meets other types of flooring materials, provide vinyl edging (color by theArchitect).
D. All Manufacturer's recommended tools, materials and equipment shall be used forinstallation. Manufacturer's printed instructions for direct glue installation procedures,including installation steps and finishing, shall be adhered to. Unsatisfactory installationresulting from work performed not in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendationsmay result in removal and re-laying of carpet at the expense of the Contractor.
E. All carpet shall be installed in accordance with the layout diagrams approved by theArchitect.
F. The carpet modules must lay flat and be tension-free. Looseness shall be pulled orstretched out.
G. All carpet installed to be uniform in color and texture for each style chosen. No noticeablevariance will be allowed between separate squares of the same carpet in the same area.
H. No raveled or highly visible seams will be allowed.I. The carpet shall run under items such as heating convectors, demountable drywall
partitions, etc., and shall be installed tight against columns, masonry walls, and cabinetsso that all portions of the floor area are covered with carpet. All other obstructions whichmay occur shall be reported to the Architect prior to any work or fabrication.
J. Clean carpet upon completion of installation and provide protection until projectcompletion. The type of non-staining cover material that should be used for the protectivecover shall be recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
K. Provide the Owner with a quantity of carpet squares approximately equal to 2% of theinstalled area for future repair and replacement.
L. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall remove all waste, excessmaterials, tools ,and equipment.
End of Section
099000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 099000 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Wood doors.B. Hollow metal door frames.C. New and existing gypsum drywall in the area of renovation.D. Existing and repaired plaster wall & ceiling surfaces.E. Existing exposed concrete block.F. Natural finish on new wood doors to match existing in this area.G. Where indicated on the drawings at locations of new work.
1.02 Related Sections:A. Caulking and Sealants (SECTION 079200).B. Wood Doors (SECTION 082000).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Approved paint of the type required, manufactured by ICI, Benjamin Moore, Sherwin Williams,Pratt & Lambert, or approved equal.
2.02 Prior to ordering materials submit list of materials and descriptions thereof for approval.2.03 Deliver materials to building in original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken.2.04 Pigments for tinting:
A. For oil paints: color ground oil.B. Enamels: colors ground in oil.
2.05 Shellac:A. White or orange, gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol.B. Orange, limited to covering knots, resin sap.
2.06 Paint interior:A. Provide primer produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.B. Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated.C. Ferrous metals:
Semi-Gloss finish, provide where not otherwise specified:1st coat: Red oxide metal primer, performance equivalent to TT-P-86, (Duron
"Dura Clad" Damp Proof Red Oxide Metal Primer, 33-250, or approvedequivalent).
2nd coat: Enamel undercoater, TT-E-543.3rd coat: Semi-gloss enamel, TT-E-509.First coat not required on items that are shop primed.
D Galvanized metal:Semi-gloss finish, provide where not otherwise specified:1st coat: Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer, TT-P-641.2nd coat: Enamel undercoat, TT-E-543.3rd coat: Semi-gloss enamel, TT-E-509.Not less than 2.50 mils dry film thickness.
E. New and existing brick masonry units / concrete block walls (flat emulsion over filler):1st coat: Surface filler, TT-F-1098 block-filler.2nd coat: Interior latex emulsion, TT-P-29.3rd coat: Interior latex emulsion, TT-P-29.
F. Gypsum drywall in Post Office Retail 104, Business Center 106, Open Workspace 108F,and Office Area 108G:Latex eggshell enamel:1st coat: Latex primer/sealer, TT-P-650D.2nd coat: Interior latex enamel emulsion, TT-P-2119 (Class 2).3rd coat: Interior latex enamel emulsion, TT-P-2119 (Class 2).
G. Gypsum Board in Post Office 108, Office 108C, Office 108D, Mail Pickup 108E:Flat latex finish:1st Coat: Latex primer, TT-P-650.2nd Coat: Interior latex emulsion, TT-P-29.
1st coat: Acrylic primer/finish, TT-P-1975 (white tint).2nd coat: Acrylic primer/finish, TT-P-1975 (white tint).Not less than 2.50 mils dry film thickness per coat.
I. Painted wood:Semi-Gloss finish, Provide where not otherwise specified.1st coat: Enamel undercoat, TT-E-543 (Omit over previously painted wood
surfaces)..2nd coat: Semi-gloss enamel, TT-E-509.3rd coat: Semi-gloss enamel, TT-E-509.Fill open grained wood with filler complying with TT-F-336 and wipe before first varnishcoat. Color tone to match existing doors.
J. Natural finished woodwork (new wood doors - to match other doors in the area):1st coat: Interior oil stain, TT-S-711.2nd coat: Bleached shellac, TT-S-300.3rd coat: Rubbing varnish, TT-V-86.4th coat: Rubbing varnish, TT-V-86.Fill open grained wood with filler complying with TT-F-336 and wipe before first varnishcoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Number of paint colors:Approximately 5, to be selected.
3.02 Store materials in space designated and protect space from damage.A. Keep paints covered at all times, protect form freezing.B. Safeguard against fire, provide metal containers for oil, cloth and waste.
3.03 Inspection of surfaces:A. Before starting work have defects remedied. Commencing work implies acceptance of
surfaces.B. If dryness of surfaces is doubtful, use dampness indicating meter for test.
3.04 Painting:A. Preparation of surfaces:
1. Do not start painting and finishing until surfaces are suitable.2. Report unsuitable surfaces to the Architect before application of paint or finish.3. Remove all efflorescence, chalk, and dust from cementitious surfaces.4. Remove rust and scale from metal surfaces with wire brushing and sanding.5. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces with turpentine or benzine.6. Remove dirt and mildew in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations.B. Determine alkalinity of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces
are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint,correct this condition before application of paint.
C. Shop primed metals:1. Touch-up shop-applied and field-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare
and keep touched-up as necessary, before and after installation or erection of theitems, to maintain protection of the metal from rust and corrosion.
2. Clean and touch-up with the same type primer as initially used.3. Prime welds, new bolts, rivets and other fastening devices in metal work.4. Touch-up primed surfaces to be concealed in the construction prior to concealing.
D. Wood:1. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil, or other foreign substances.2. Scrape off loose paint, and if necessary, lightly sand and dust off existing
woodwork exposed to view to insure adhesion.3. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots on new wood and apply a thin coat
of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primercoat.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plasticwood-filler. Sand smooth when dried.
5. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job painted immediately upon delivery to
DIVISION 09. FINISHES
SECTION 099000 PAINTING (CONTINUED)
099000-3Project No. 16-20
job.6. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including
cabinets, counters, trim, etc.7. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.8. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-offs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job.E. Application:
1. Quality work is recognized and will be demanded. Sloppy striking, holidays,inadequate coverage, etc., Will not be accepted.
2. Spread materials evenly and flow on smoothly free from sags, runs, brush marksand corduroy, not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate toestablish a total dry film thickness as specified, or if not specified, asrecommended by the coating manufacturer.
3. Allow undercoats to dry hard before application of subsequent coat.4. Mix and apply paints and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's detailed
specifications or directions.5. Prime as soon as practical after delivery or placement of all un-coated work
requiring painted finish. Retouch bare areas caused by working or handling.6. On surfaces of door frames, trim and metal work that will be concealed or
inaccessible in the finished work, apply one coat of paint after the work is fittedbut before it is placed.
7. Provide adequate protection to prevent paint being splashed or dropped onadjacent surfaces or different finish.
8. Mechanical and electrical work:1. Painting of mechanical / electrical work is limited to those items exposed
in the finished areas.2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles,
with a flat, non-specular black paint.9. Natural finishes:
A. Rub thoroughly with 00 steel wool removing all hair grain and leavingperfectly smooth surface.
B. Rub thoroughly between each coat with 6/0 steel wool.C. Apply wood filler / conditioner to soft woods and assemblies consisting of
different species of woods.D. After thirty minutes apply first coat of stain with brush or cloth.E. Allow to penetrate wood five to fifteen minutes and wipe off with cloth and
allow to dry over night (eight hours minimum).F. Repeat for second stain coat.G. After twenty four hours apply satin polyurethane finish, or sanding sealer,
unless other finish (oil or wax) is specified, in which case, followmanufacturer's application instructions for these products.
H. Allow to dry over night and apply second coat of polyurethane over firstcoat.
I. Prepare samples of natural finish for approval prior to commencement ofwork.
10. Cleaning up:Remove paint from fixtures, glass, furniture, fittings, etc.
3.05 Protection:A. Loosen canopies of lighting fixtures, cover while painting, replace upon completion.B. Remove electric plates, surface hardware; protect and replace upon completion.C. Mask off all convenience outlets after removing cover plates before painting.D. Mask all areas to be left unfinished that are adjacent to painted surfaces.
End of Section
101400-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
1. WORK INCLUDED:
A. Interior door and room identification signs.B. Installation.C. Samples.
2. MATERIALS:
Interior door and room identification signs:1. As manufactured by Scott Sign Systems, Inc.; Andco Industries Corporation; ASI Sign
Systems; Graphic Systems; or approved equal.2. General:
The Contractor to furnish signage for all new interior doors furnished under thiscontract and existing scheduled doors in the area of renovation, and at any speciallocations where noted on the drawings. Design and types of signs to be as noted inthese specifications and shown on the accompanying attachments.
3. Background color:Gray, Pantone 404C or Pantone 424C, as selected by the Owner, the standardbackground color for interior signage as established by the University of NorthCarolina at Greensboro.
4. Message copy to be WHITE. All lettering to be HELVETICA MEDIUM. All arrows andother symbols to be as shown on attachments. Any symbols not shown are to be asprescribed by the Construction Specification Institute or if no standard symbol exists,as approved by the UNCG Office of Facilities Planning.
5. Braille letters.A. Glass raster grade 2 braille.B. Formed with individual computer drilled 1.55 mm holes, filled with glass beads
seeded one half depth of hole.
6. Type A signs (interior room directional signs):A. Acrylic matte finish acrylic.B. 1/4" thick, with color applied subsurface.C. Message copy to be Helvetica Medium subsurface vinyl or subsurface silk-
screened, as approved by the Owner.D. Background color is PMS 404 or PMS 424, as approved by the Owner.
Message color to be white, No. 3690, as manufactured by 3M.
7. Type B signs (room signs for non-office areas):A. Signs to be matte finish acrylic, 1/8 inch thick, color applied subsurface.B. Room numbers to be 1 inch high, accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Cap
height of message copy to be 5/8 inch high. Content of message to be asscheduled.
C. Raised injected molded letters, minimum thickness of 1/32 inch, to bechemically welded to the top surface.
9. Type C signs (room signs for toilets and locker rooms):A. Signs to be matte finish acrylic, 1/8 inch thick, color applied subsurface.B. Room numbers to be 1 inch high, accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Cap
height of message copy to be 5/8 inch high. Content of message to be as
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS (CONTINUED)
101400-2Project No. 16-20
scheduled.C. Raised injected molded letters, minimum thickness of 1/32 inch, to be
chemically welded to the top surface.D. Symbols to be silk-screened.
8. Type D signs (room signs for office areas):A. Signs to be matte finish acrylic, 1/8 inch thick, color applied subsurface.B. Room numbers to be 1 inch high, accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Cap
height of message copy to be 5/8 inch high. Content of message to be asscheduled.
C. Raised injected molded letters, minimum thickness of 1/32 inch, to bechemically welded to the top surface.
10. Type E signs (changeable room signs for office areas):A. Signs to be matte finish acrylic sandwich composed of two sheets of 1/8 inch
thick acrylic, background color subsurface applied.B. Furnish with a milled slot to accept a sliding message strip.C. Message strip to be vinyl with applied pressure-sensitive Scotchcoe letters.D. Room numbers to be 7/8 inch high, accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Cap
height of message copy to be 5/8 inch high. Content of message to be asscheduled.
E. Room numbers / names to be of raised injected molded letters, minimumthickness of 1/32 inch, to be chemically welded to the top surface.
F. Background color is PMS 404 or PMS 424, as approved by the Owner. Background color of message strip to match sign color. Message color to bewhite, No. 3690, as manufactured by 3M.
11. Type F signs (departmental signs):A. Acrylic matte finish acrylic.B. 1/4" thick, with color applied subsurface.C. Message copy to be Helvetica Medium subsurface vinyl or subsurface silk-
screened, as approved by the Owner.D. Background color is PMS 404 or PMS 424, as approved by the Owner.
Message color to be white, No. 3690, as manufactured by 3M.
3. INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP:
Interior door, room identification, and directional signs:1. Smooth surfaces (glass, door surfaces, painted drywall):
Install signs with double-coated neoprene tape on smooth, non-porous surfaces. Provide a backplate of the same color and material when a sign is to be mounted onglass.
2. Irregular surfaces (masonry, vinyl surfaces, etc.):Use shim-plate mounting (SPM) on irregular surfaces to include a minimum of twoaluminum shim-plates (.090 or .125 inch thickness) with pre-drilled and countersunkholes fastened with screws in expansion shields to substrate; attach sign to the plateswith vinyl foam tape (VTM).
3. Mounting heights:A. Type A, B signs (room signs for non-office areas):
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS (CONTINUED)
101400-3Project No. 16-20
Signs are to be mounted to the wall on the latch side of the door unlessotherwise noted, 4 inches from the door frame if possible with the highestBraille letters located 60 inches above the finished floor. If mounted on thedoor, the sign shall be centered, with the highest Braille letters 60 inchesabove the finished floor.
B. Type D, E signs (room signs for office areas):Signs are to be mounted to the wall on the latch side of the door unlessotherwise noted, 4 inches from the door frame if possible with the highestBraille letters 60 inches above the finished floor. If mounted on the door, thesign shall be centered, with the highest Braille letters 60 inches above thefinished floor.
C. Type C signs (room signs for locker and toilet areas):1. Signs are to be mounted to the wall on the latch side of the door
unless otherwise noted, 4 inches from the door frame if possible withthe highest Braille letters 60 inches above the finished floor. Ifmounted on the door, the sign shall be centered, with the highestBraille letters 60 inches above the finished floor.
2. If additional safety signs are scheduled for the same door, they shallbe mounted directly below the sign carrying the room number, and thecenter of the top sign shall remain 60 inches to the highest Brailleletters.
D. Type F signs (departmental signs):Signs should be mounted on the wall on the latch side of the door with double-coated neoprene tape. Signs should be 4" from the door frame with the top ofthe sign 5'-0" above the finished floor.
E. Mount to specified height, level and true.
4. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES:
A. Submit one actual sample of each type of sign to be used on the project for approvalby the Architect and the Owner.
B. Full scale drawings of each sign to be supplied.C. As required by Section 013323.
5. WARRANTIES:
Letters to be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship fora period of five years. Sign manufacturer shall also warrant letters against cracking, peeling,delamination, shrinking, discoloration or bleeding for a period of five years.
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS (CONTINUED)
101400-4Project No. 16-20
6. SIGN TYPES:
102613-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 102613 PROTECTIVE CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Summary:A. This section includes the following wall protection system:
1. Vinyl Corner Guards (for use in Post Office Retail 104, Business Center 106 andwhere otherwise noted on the drawings).
2. Stainless Steel Corner Guards (for use in Post Office 108, Office 108B, Office108C, Office Area 108 G, and where otherwise noted on the drawings).
1.02 Related Sections:A. Section 092000 Metal Lath, Plaster, StuccoB. Section 092900 Gypsum Drywall
1.03 References:A. Abbreviations and Acronyms:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1.03 Submittals:A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 013323.B. Product Data:
1. Data sheet illustrating product dimensions, options, and related components..2. Installation instructions.
C. Samples for verification of design suitability, color, and finish.1. 12” (304) Long sample of model selected.
D. Test reports from a qualified independent laboratory showing results in compliance torequirements indicated
1.04 Quality Assurance:A. Manufacturer to have no less than 5 years experience in the production of wall protection
products having successful in-service performance.B. Color Control: Provide extruded components that meet visual and colorimetric evaluation
of color to a controlled standard.1. Colorimetric evaluation less than or equal to 1.0 CMC DE (Delta E) when
measured under cool white fluorescent lighting.1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
A. Storage: Store wall protection products in original packaging. Protect from weather,extreme temperatures, and moisture.1. Maintain temperature during storage between 40°- 100°F (4°- 38°C).2. Store materials flat to prevent twisting or sagging of cartons.
B. Handling: Take adequate measure to prevent damage to materials. Avoid exposure ofplastic products to direct sunlight.
1.06 Site Conditions:A. Ambient Conditions: Do not install wall protection products until installation areas are
enclosed and weatherproof. HVAC system must be operational and maintainingtemperature at 65°-75°F (18°-24°C) for at least 72 hours prior to installation.
1. Wallguard Model 2325.1C, 1 1/2” (38) x 1 1/2” (38) x 90° Surface mounted cornerguard.
2. For installation with factory applied double coated adhesive tape.3. Available in angles other than 90°.4. Select from manufacturer’s standard or custom colors.5. 48" long for use at columns above casework in finished areas and elsewhere
where noted on the drawings..B. Design and Performance Criteria:
1. Flammability Characteristics: High impact vinyl components.A. Class A Interior wall finish (NFPA 101 Life Safety) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.1. Flame Spread: 25 or less2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less
2. Classification of HB when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.C. Stain Resistance: High impact vinyl components.
1. Material to be tested for stain resistance to various chemical reagents inaccordance with ASTM D543.
D. Bacterial and Fungal Growth: High impact vinyl components.1. Material must not support bacteria or fungal growth when tested in accordance
with ASTM G21 and ASTM G22.E. Impact Resistance: High impact vinyl components.
1. Izod impact strength ASTM D256 method A notched, 23.8 ft-lbs/in average withno break.
2. Charpy impact strength ASTM D6110 notched, 26.1 ft-lbs/in average with nobreak.
F. Materials:1. Corner Guard: Extruded high impact vinyl, nominal 0.080” (2) thickness colored
throughout.2. Double Coated Adhesive Tape: White closed cell polyethylene foam, coated both
sides with high performance acrylic adhesive. White kraft liner.3. Adhesive Alternative:
Install corner guards with Pawling model ADH-50 low VOC polyurethane basedconstruction adhesive, model ADH-60 low VOC mastic adhesive, model ADH-303M™ Fastbond™ contact adhesive, or equivalent.
2.03 Stainless Steel Corner Guards:A. Basis of Design:
1. Wallguard Model 2330.1, 2" x 2" x 90° surface mounted stainless steel cornerguard with 1/8" radius corner.
2. Construction adhesive to be included for standard installation.3. Angles other than 90° and wings other than 2" shall be available.
B. Materials:1. Stainless Steel: Type 304 (ASTM A240), 16 gauge, with #4 satin finish.2. Adhesive:
Model ADH-50 low VOC polyurethane based construction adhesive.C. Fabrication:
1. Corner guards shall be factory formed from stainless steel sheet.2. Lengthwise perimeter edges to include nominal 10" return bend.3. Edge burrs shall be removed.4. Single piece fabrication to 72" in length.
3.01 Examination:A. Examine walls for availability of backing to ensure secure attachment of wall protection
products.B. Verify that HVAC is operating and installation area temperature has been maintained
between 65°-75°F (18°-24°C) for at least 72 hours prior to installation.C. Verify application of wall finishes has been completed in accordance with project finish
plan.3.02 Preparation:
Surface Preparation: Clean substrate to remove dust and debris.3.03 Installation:
A. Acclimate materials to building conditions for at least 24 hours prior to installation.B. Install wall protection products in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.04 Protection:Protect installed material from damage by other trades. Use materials that will not mark, stain, orleave residue on the product.
End of Section
105500-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 10. SPECIALTIES
SECTION 105500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Mail drop.B. Installation.C. Samples.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
Mail Drop:A. As manufactured by Salsbury Industries; Signature Hardware, Ives, or approved
equal.B. Mail Slot and chute.
1. Standard similar to Salsbury Industries Model #2255.2. Aluminum, stainless steel or polished nickel finlsh.3. Custom engraved “MAIL” letters on mail slot flap.4. Size: 11" wide x 4" high.5. Adjustable mail flap stop:
A. To be attached to the inside of each mail drop chute.B. Adjustable to limit the size of the mail flap opeing.
C. Chute:A. To come standard with mail slot.B. 11.3/4" x 5" high x 6.1/4" deep.C. Chute angled at 25 degrees.
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION:
A. Install in drywall partition in strict accord with manufacturer’s installation instructions.B. Clean and leave in perfect working condition.
End of Section
123000-1Project No. 16-20
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included:A. Manufactured laminate casework systems.B. All items shall be as provided, and publicly cataloged, by one manufacturer to
assure physical and dimensional integrity of the system and ready access toadditional systems components for a minimum of ten (10) years after completion ofthis contract.
C. Fabrication and installation of built-in laminate clad casework and components,countertops and related items specified herein.
1.03 References:A. ANSI-A135: for all hardboard.B. ANSI-A161.2-1998: for performance of fabricated high-pressure decorative laminate
countertops.C. ANSI-A208.1-2009: for grade M-3 mat-formed wood particleboard.D. BHMA A156.9: for grade-1 hinge requirements.E. NEMA 3 LD-2005: for performance requirements of high pressure laminates.F. SEFA 8PL Recommended Practices: for cabinet construction.
1.04 Definitions:A. Exposed:
1. In casework, surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors (if any) areclosed; behind clear glass doors; bottoms of cabinets 42" or more abovefinished floor; and tops of cabinets less than 78" above finished floor.
B. Semi-Exposed:1. In casework, surfaces that become visible when opaque doors are open or
drawers are extended; bottoms of cabinets more than 30" or tops of cabinetsless than 42" above finished floor.
1.05 Submittals:A. Shop Drawings:
1. Comply with the requirements of Section 013323.2. Include manufacturer’s catalog numbers and specifications.3. Submit three sets of laser quality, 11 x 17 shop drawings consisting of:
A. Finish, hardware, construction options selection sheet.B. Small scale floor plan showing casework in relation to the building.C. Large scale elevations and plan views.D. Cross-sections; service runs; locations of blocking within walls
(blocking is done by others); rough-in requirements and, sinkcenterlines
4. Approved shop drawings to be returned to manufacturer at least 60 daysbefore production.
5. Project Architect and Construction Manager must approve all items prior tofabrication and delivery of casework.
6. Manufacturer and/or Manufacturer’s representative shall verify all criticalbuilding dimensions prior to fabrication.
B. Samples:1. Submit one set of laminate color brochures from standard laminate
manufacturers Wilsonart, Formica, Pionite, and Nevamar.2. Submit one edge color sample chain.3. Submit one set of interior colors samples.4. Submit catalog showing construction details, material specifications and
hardware specifications of all items used.C. LEED Submittals:
1. Provide EPP certificates of core for Credit MR 4.1 and [MR 4.2]: forcasework core having recycled content.
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-2Project No. 16-20
2. Provide FSC certificate for Credit MR 7: for products havingchain-of-custody certificate certifying that the wood used in the caseworkcomplies with FSC requirements.
3. Provide product data for IEQ 4.4: for casework core being manufacturedwithout the use of urea formaldehyde.
D. Warranty:Provide sample warranty document stating specified terms as referenced in 1.8.
1.06 Quality Assurance:A. Comply with AWI, for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction,
finishes, and other requirements.B. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that the woodwork,
including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:1. Deliver casework once painting, and similar requirements have been
completed that will not damage casework. This includes ensuring spacesare enclosed and weather tight.
2. All casework shall be blanket wrapped for protection during shipping.B. Storage and Handling:
1. Casework must be protected from dust, dirt and/or other trades.2. Countertops are stacked, properly supported and spaced evenly to avoid
warping. Large pieces are stacked first on the pallets with shorter piecesstacked on top.
1.08 Site Conditions:A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Do not deliver or install the casework until concrete, masonry, anddrywall/plaster work is dry; ambient relative humidity is maintained between25 – 55% prior to delivery and throughout the life of installation; and thetemperature is controlled above 55°F.
2. Casework shall not be stored or installed in non-climate controlledconditions.
3. If ambient conditions are not met at the time of requested delivery, thegeneral contractor or owner must provide Case Systems a letter releasingmanufacturer from any liability and responsibility from any warranty ordamage resulting from not complying with required ambient conditions.
1.09 Warranty:A. Manufacturer shall offer a Three-Year warranty to the original owner against
defective material and workmanship.1. The warranty specifically does not cover any product or hardware, which has
been incorrectly installed, including poor climate conditions, exposed toexcessive loads or abuse.
B. In-Service Training Seminar:1. The casework system contractors shall conduct a one day in-service training
seminar for all staff, including facility maintenance personnel. The programwill be held prior to move in or at the convenience of owner representatives.
2. Seminar shall include orientation of use of casework system(s),maintenance of casework and description of modularity of systemcomponents.
3. Inclusion of one catalog binder depicting installed systems and identifyingmanufacturer and local representative will be provided to Owner for futurereference.
4. Cost of in-service shall be included in casework contractor's bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable manufacturers:1. Manufacturer and product type:
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-3Project No. 16-20
A. As manufactured by one of the following:1. Case Systems, Inc., Midland, Michigan.2. TMi Systems Design Corporation, Dickinson, North Dakota.3. CSC, Inc., Effingham, Illinois.4. Interior Wood Specialities, Inc., Elizabethtown, North Carolina.5. Or approved equal.
B. Construction and features to be in accordance with cataloged storagesystems, that are fully modular and dimensionally integrated to allow Ownerinterchange of doors, drawers, and interior components. Manufacturer toprovide brochure specifically depicting ADA requirements and systemcompliance where applicable.
C. Substitutions:1. It is the intent of this specification to establish performance and
quality criteria consistent with pre-established standards of designand function herein described. Casework systems not meetingthese minimum standards will not be accepted.
2. Where specific materials, finish options, construction details,modularity, hardware and test data are specified herein, thecasework storage system will be held in strict compliance. Substitutions will be considered prior provided request is submittedto the Architect, in writing; substitution request shall list any and alldeviations from the specified system.
2.02 Materials:A. Provide plastic laminate faced cabinets manufactured with:
1. Particleboard Core:A. All particleboard shall be Grade M-3 and shall meet or exceed all
requirements as set by ANSI A208.1-2009.Density: 40-50 lbs/cu.ftMoisture Content: 10% MaximumModulus of Rupture: 2393 psiModulus of Elasticity: 398,900 psiInternal Bond: 80 psiHardness: 500 pounds MinimumLinear Expansion: 0.35%Thickness Tolerance: +/- 0.008"Face Screw Holding: 247 pounds Minimum
2. MR (Moisture Resistant)/FSC Core shall be:A. Interior-Grade moisture resistant particleboard.B. Meet or exceed M-3 Grade, according ANSI-A208.1-2009.
1. For casework core having recycled content.2. For casework core being manufactured without the use of
urea formaldehyde.3. For products having chain-of-custody certificates certifying
that the wood used in the casework complies with FSCrequirements.
B. NAUF/FSC (No added Urea Formaldehyde) Plywood:1. Plywood that meets or exceeds the standards set forth by the
APA for structural use panels.2. For casework core being manufactured without the use of
urea formaldehyde.3. For products having chain-of-custody certificates certifying
that the wood used in the casework complies with FSCrequirements.
B. Joinery:1. Mechanical Joinery:
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-4Project No. 16-20
A. All cabinet body components shall be secured utilizing concealedinterlocking mechanical fasteners as approved by AWS Edition 2,Section 10.
C. Surface Material:1. Acceptable laminate color, pattern, and finish as either scheduled or
otherwise indicated on drawings or as selected by Architect frommanufacturer’s standards types and nominal thickness including:A. Vertical surface decorative grade VGS: .028” thick.B. General purpose decorative grade HGS: .048” thick.C. Cabinet decorative liner grade CLS: .020” thick.D. Non-decorative backer grade BKH: .028” thick.E. Thermally fused melamine laminate.F. Chemical resistant decorative laminate.
D. Edge banding:PVC:A. Shall be applied utilizing hot melt adhesive and radiused by automatic
trimmers. Edging shall be available in a variety of color options.B. Casework manufacturers shall offer a minimum of ten (10) solid colors to
choose from.E. Adhesives:
1. PVA:A. Adhesive shall be mechanically applied.B. NAUF, no VOC.
2. EVA:Adhesive shall be mechanically applied.
2.03 Fabrication:A. General Cabinet Body Construction:
1. Cabinet Box Style shall be reveal overlay.2. Cabinet Box Core shall be particle board.3. Bottoms and ends of cabinets, and tops of tall cabinets and tops and
bottoms of wall cabinets (all structural components) shall be ¾ -inch thick.4. All panels shall be manufactured with balanced construction.5. Fixed interior components such as fixed shelves, dividers, and cubicle
compartments shall be full 3/4" thick unless noted otherwise and attachedwith concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners.
6. Cabinet body exterior surfaces shall be VGS. (Thermofused melamine willnot be permitted on door and drawer fronts or other exposed surfaces.)
7. Cabinet interior shall be finished VGS where open.8. Cabinet body interior surfaces shall be thermally fused melamine laminate
where concealed.9. Cabinet body front edge shall be 3mm PVC.10. Mounting stretchers are 3/4" thick structural components fastened to end
panels and back by mechanical fasteners, and are concealed by the cabinetback.
11. When the rear of a cabinet is exposed, a separate finished 3/4" thickdecorative laminate back panel shall be used.
12. Backs of cabinets are 1/2" thick surfaced both sides for balancedconstruction and fully captured on both sides and bottom.
13. A 5mm diameter row hole pattern 32mm (1-1/4") on center shall be bored incabinet ends for adjustable shelves. This row hole pattern shall also servefor hardware mounting and replacement and/or relocation of cabinetcomponents.
14. An upper 3/4" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel andattached between the end panels with mechanical fasteners. This stretcheris also fastened to the sub-top.
B. Base Cabinet Construction:1. Base cabinets shall have a solid 3/4" thick sub-top (of core as specified
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-5Project No. 16-20
above), fastened between the ends with interlocking mechanical fasteners.2. Sink cabinets with a split removable back panel shall have a formed metal
front brace, and steel corner gussets shall be utilized to support andsecurely fasten top in all four corners. Front brace shall be powder coatedblack.
C. Tall Cabinet Construction:All tall cabinets shall be provided with an intermediate fixed shelf to maintaininternal dimensional stability under heavy loading conditions as well as anintermediate 3/4" thick stretcher located behind the back panel and be securedbetween the cabinet ends with mechanical fasteners. The stretcher shall be securedto the shelf through the back with #8 x 2" plated flat head screws.
D. Wall Cabinet Construction:1. All wall cabinet bottoms shall be ¾-inch thick core (type specified above),
mechanically fastened between end panels and secured to the bottom backstretcher. A lower 3/4" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back paneland attached between the end panels with mechanical fasteners. Thestretcher is also secured through the back and into the cabinet bottom.
2. All wall cabinet exterior bottoms shall match exterior surface finish.3. All wall cabinet tops shall be ¾-inch.
E. Tall and Wall Cabinet Top Edges shall be: .020" PVC at Top of End Panels.F. Tall, Wall and Hutch Tops shall be: Material Match Standard Interior.G. Tall, Wall and Hutch Upper Door Reveal shall be: 3mm (1/8") Reveal.H. Toe Base of Cabinet:
1. Individual bases shall be constructed of Raw Exterior Glue Plywood factoryapplied to base and tall cabinets and shall support and carry the load of theend panels, and the cabinet bottom, directly to the floor. The base shall belet in from the sides and back of the cabinet to allow cabinets to be installedtightly together and tight against a wall, also to conceal the top edge ofapplied vinyl base molding (not supplied by casework manufacturer). Thereshall be a front to back center support for all bases over 30" wide.
2. Toe Base Height 4" (102mm).3. Toe Base Options: Attached.
I. Drawer Fronts and Solid Doors:1. All drawer fronts and solid door components shall be particleboard surfaced
both sides for balanced construction.2. Options shall be HPL door and drawer front exterior and Grade CLS on
interior.3. Surfaces shall be HPL Grade VGS4. Door and drawer front edge shall be 3mm PVC.
J. Drawer Boxes:1. Drawer box constructed with a full 1/2" thick core shall be particleboard
non-racking, non-deflecting platform bottom that is carried directly by “L”shaped, bottom mount drawer glides.
2. Drawer box at finished interiors shall be surface to match standard interior.3. Standard: Slides are secured with 1-1/4" long screws driven through the
platform and into the sides. Drawer box sides, backs, sub-front, and bottomshall be 1/2". The top edge shall be nominal 1mm (.020") PVC matching thedrawer color. Drawer box corners shall be joined with fluted hardwooddowels and glue spaced at a minimum of 32mm on center. Drawer boxfronts shall be removable and attached to drawer box sub-front with screwsfrom inside of drawer. Horizontal parting rails between drawers shall be 3/4"thick core, with balanced surfaces, secured to and further reinforcing cabinetends. File drawer box shall have full-height sides supporting a heavy-dutysupport rail for hanging file folders.
K. Doors:1. Solid Doors shall be ¾" thick core.2. Glazed Doors, Framed shall be:
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-6Project No. 16-20
Hinged or sliding 3/4" thick, framed doors shall be safety tempered glasspanels. Panels must be a minimum of ¼" thick. Glazing panel shall be setinto the doorframe without the use of a separate molding. Glazing shall beheld in place with removable stops.
3. Glazed Doors, Frameless shall be:Sliding, minimum of 1/4" thick tempered glass panels. All edges to be radiusground and polished.
4. Sliding Doors shall be:A. Extruded aluminum upper track with anodized finish. All tall cabinets
shall receive two hanging brackets per door with two rollers perbracket. All other cabinets shall receive two hanging brackets perdoor with one roller per bracket. The bottom of door shall becaptured in a retainer to prevent doors from swinging in or out.
5. Pocket Doors shall be:A. Zinc plated, self-closing, three-way adjustable geometric door hinge
with precision steel ball bearing slides.6. Grille Doors shall be:
A. Powder coated platinum finish, grille doors where shown or notedwith model number shall have individual lock hasps and numberplates.
B. Single wide grille doors where shown or noted shall have individual,zinc plated stay-close wire door latches. The wire door latch is arobust, door/side-mounted design made of 13-gauge cold rolledsteel. A self-latching lever smoothly travels over the hasp and fallsinto a positive latched, stay-close position. For security, the door canbe locked with a padlock. This option is not available on cabinetswith double door configurations.
L. Shelves:1. Adjustable:
A. Adjustable shelves shall be particleboard core, with balancedsurfaces.
B. Adjustable shelves in closed cabinets shall be 3/4" shelves, 1" forshelves over 30" wide.
C. All adjustable shelves in open cabinets shall be 1" thick, except forspecial cabinets such as mail, cubical, instrument, or locker typeunits.
D. Adjustable shelf edge on open cabinets shall be 3 mm PVC on frontedge, .020" on back and sides.
E. Adjustable shelf edge on closed cabinets shall be 3 mm on frontedge.
F. Adjustable shelf shall be set back 23 mm from the front (for doorswith standard locks).
2. Fixed:A. Fixed shelves shall be particleboard.B. Fixed shelves shall be 3/4" shelves, 1" for shelves over 30" wide.C. Fixed shelf surfaces on closed and open cabinets shall match
interior selections.D. Wall shelving exposed edges shall be 3 mm PVC thermally fused.
4. Wire shelves shall be white, plastic coated.5. Hardboard shelves shall 1/4" thick tempered hardboard. All hardboard shall
have a “S2S” surface finish.6. Countertops:
A. High-pressure decorative laminate, nominal 1" thick solid core,conforming to NEMA Standard LD3-2005 and ANSI A161.2-1998.1. General Purpose: HGS on horizontal surface.2. Laminate bonded to M-2 particleboard (NAUF Plywood at
sink cut-outs) core with PVA rigid adhesives. Core shall be
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-7Project No. 16-20
balanced with backing Grade BKL.3. All joints shall be secured with biscuits for alignment and
tight joint fasteners.4. Provide 4" high back splashes with thickness matching
countertop thickness where shown and at all ends abuttingwalls and adjacent cabinets.
5. Provide same edge material as top.6. Maximum lengths of HPL buildup particleboard tops shall be
12'-0" and the maximum lengths of HPL buildup plywoodtops shall be 8'-0".
B. Post Form:1. Top shall be 1.1/2" (2) 3/4" thick buildup thick M-2
engineered board core.2. Depth of tops shall be as shown on the drawings.3. Maximum lengths of post formed HPL buildup particleboard
tops shall be 12', and the maximum lengths of post formedHPL buildup plywood tops shall be 8'.
C. Each hinge shall be secured with a minimum of nine No. 8 screws.D. Hinge shall permit door to swing 270 degrees without binding.E. Doors less than 48" in height shall have two hinges.F. Doors over 48" in height shall have three hinges.
8. Pulls:A. One pull shall be: located at the centerline of the drawer, regardless
of width, to ensure ease of operation and maximize drawer slide life.B. Door and drawer front pulls shall be epoxy finished metal wire style,
8 mm diameter with 96mm spacing on fasteners.C. Pull design shall be compatible with Americans with Disability Act
(ADA), Federal Register Volume 56, No. 144, specifically paragraph4.27.4. Other pulls may be acceptable pending architect approval.
9. Drawer Slides:A. Standard Drawer:
1. Self-closing, bottom mount epoxy coated with captive rollerand positive in stop.
2. Slide shall have 100 lb. load rating, must be self-closing andmust prevent drawer fronts from contacting the cabinet body.
3. Drawer slides must meet or exceed Grade 1 requirementsper ANSI A156.9/BHMA with full extension slides on file andpaper storage
B. File Drawers:1. Full extension, bottom mount epoxy coated with captive roller
and positive in stop.2. Slide shall have 100lb. load rating, must be: full extension,
and prevent drawer fronts from contacting the cabinet body.3. Drawer slides must meet or exceed Grade 1 requirements
per ANSI/BHMA.10. Wall Shelving Hardware:
A. Standard duty wall shelving hardware, including standards andbrackets, furnished in an anochrome finish
B. Bracket mounted shelf core shall be particleboard.C. Bracket mounted shelf edge shall be 3mm.D. Bracket mounted shelf surface shall be VGS laminate.
11. Shelf Clips:
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-8Project No. 16-20
A. Typical Shelving:Shelf clips shall be injected molded clear plastic, with a double pinengagement 32mm on center and shall have 3/4" and 1" anti-tiplocking tabs as approved in AWI 400B-T-9 for premium Grade.
B. 1/4" Hardboard Shelves:Shelf clips shall be: single pin plastic shelf clip with anti-tip lockingtabs, used for all 1/4" hardboard shelves.
12. Coat Hooks:Zinc plated, single prong and double prong.
13. Closet Rods:Zinc plated rod, 1" diameter with captive sockets.
14. Mirrors:Teacher wardrobe mirrors shall be 8" x 10" where noted.
15. Label Holders shall be on all drawers and single / or right doors when pairsare indicated.
16. Locks:A. Lock locations:
1. Locks to be provided on all doors and drawers.2. Locks to be keyed alike on each section of cabinets and
master keyed.B. Lock Type:
1. National: Five disc tumbler cam locks, chrome plated steelfaceplate.
2. Shall permit a minimum of 50 keying options.3. Lock core shall be removable permitting owner to easily
change lock arrangements.C. Inactive door of base and wall cabinets shall be: secured by using an
elbow catch, or a chain pull for tall cabinets.17. Catches:
A. Chain Pulls shall be zinc plated, spring loaded door catch used tohold door securely shut.
B. Chain Stops shall be zinc plated, looped chain used to limit doorswing as specified, mounting plate at each end of chain shall use (4)#7 x 5/8" screws to secure to cabinet door and end panel. They shallbe on cabinets at adjoining walls and where casework andcountertops can interfere with the door swing of the tall cabinet.
C. Elbow Catch shall be chrome plated, spring loaded, used to holdnon-locking door securely shut.
D. Roller Catch, (not used with self-closing hinges) shall have:heavy-duty, spring-loaded roller, with molded plastic bumpermounted at door top to keep door securely shut.
E. Magnetic Catch, (not used with self-closing hinges) shall have: whiteplastic housing with two 32mm spaced, elongated holes forscrew-attachment to allow adjustability.
F. Catches shall be magnetic at base and wall, 1 roller at tall.18. Tote Trays:
Tote Tray shall be white, high impact resistant polystyrene, with label holderpermanently attached to face of tray. Supported by individual polycarbonatechannels mounted to cabinet ends and partitions with two integral 5mmdiameter pins and secured with one-euro style screw. Height adjustable on32mm (1-1/4") centers.
19. Countertop Supports:Powder coated, formed metal supports. Must provide attachment pointsbetween countertop and wall.
1. High Pressure Laminate is available in non-premium, non-specialty and
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-9Project No. 16-20
manufacturers’ standard suede finishes from our select laminatemanufacturers, including:A. Wilsonart® in a “60” or “38” matte finish.B. Nevamar® in a “T” textured finish.C. Formica in a ”58” finish.D. Standard: Pionite in an “N” finish.
2. Thermally Fused Melamine Laminate that meets performance requirementsof ANSI/NEMA 3 LD – 2005 for GP-28.A. Natural Almond (Wilsonart D30) or Fashion Grey (Wilsonart D381) or
Frosty White (Wilsonart 1573), color as selected by the Architect.3. Concealed Cabinet Liner:
.020" thick, high-pressure cabinet liner conforming to ANSI-NEMA 3 LD -2005, Grade CLS. Surface texture shall be similar to exterior finish. Color,almond, grey, or white, shall match interior.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertop Colors:1. Wilsonart in a “60" matt finish, or Nevamar in a “T” textured finish, or
Formica in a “58" finish, or Pionite in an “N” finish.C. Hinges:
Finishes shall be available as standard in epoxy powder coat: black, almond, orplatinum.
D. Pulls:Door and drawer front pull shall be epoxy finished metal wire style, 96mm spacingon fasteners. Available in dove grey, frosty white, or light beige to match basiccabinet body color, or in contrasting black, slate grey, dawn, wildrose, clear teal,hollyberry, larkspur, or brushed chrome.
E. Glazed door trim shall selected from standard black, white, almond, or grey.F. Countertop supports shall be selected from standard light grey, light neutral, black,
or white.G. Round grommets shall be selected from standard black, almond, grey, or white.H. Colors to be selected.
2.05 Source Quality Testing:A. Cabinet Joinery:
1. Base Cabinet:A. Base cabinet testing shall be: done in accordance with SEFA 8PL
Recommended Practices Paragraph 4.0 Base Cabinets. All testingshall be performed by SEFA certified independent testing facilities.The following tests shall be performed:
The SEFA 8 test procedures are accessible on-line atwww.sefalabs.com. The ANSI/NEMA 3 LD – 2005 test proceduresare available on-line at www.global.ihs.com
Drawer testing shall be: done in accordance with SEFA 8PL RecommendedPractices Paragraph 6.0 Drawers. The following tests shall be performed:
Test ParagraphDrawer Static Test 6.1Drawer Impact Test 6.2Drawer Internal Rolling Test 6.3Drawer Cycle Test 6.4
4. Cabinet Surface Finish:Cabinet surface finish tests shall be: done in accordance with SEFA 8PLRecommended Practices Paragraph 8.0, Cabinet Surface Finish Tests. Thefollowing testing shall be performed:
Test ParagraphChemical Spot Test 8.1Boiling Water Resistance Test 8.2(ANSI/NEMA LD 3 -2005 Paragraph 3.5)Ball Impact Resistance Test 8.3(ANSI/NEMA LD 3 -2005 Paragraph 3.8)Dart Impact resistance Test 8.4(ANSI/NEMA LD 3 – 2005 Paragraph 3.9)
5. Edge Delaminating Test:Edge delaminating tests shall be done in accordance with SEFA 8PLRecommended Practices Paragraph 8.5, Edge Delaminating Test.
6. Wall, Counter Mounted, and Tall Cabinets Load Test:The wall mounted cabinet load test shall be: done in accordance with SEFA8PL Recommended Practices Paragraph 9.0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Inspection:A. The installer must examine the job site and the conditions under which the work
under this section is to be performed, and notify the contractor in writing ofunsatisfactory conditions.
B. The casework contractor shall verify all critical building dimensions prior tofabrication of casework.
C. Do not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
3.02 Preparation:Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior toinstalling.
3.03 Installation:A. Casework shall not be installed until concrete, masonry, and drywall/plaster work is
dry.B. Casework shall be installed plumb and true and is to be securely anchored in place.C. Install casework with factory-trained supervision authorized by manufacturer. Erect
casework, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required. Where laminate clad casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut to accuratefit.
D. Provide all labor for unloading, distribution, and installation of casework and relateditems as specified.
E. All casework shall be: securely anchored to horizontal wall blocking, not to plasterlathe or wall board.
F. The casework manufacturer shall re-configure the casework arrangements todimensions requiring 2-1/2" or less of filler at each end of wall-to-wall elevations,
DIVISION 12. FURNISHINGS
SECTION 123000 LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK (CONTINUED)
123000-11Project No. 16-20
and to ensure a complete and satisfactory installation.G. The casework installer shall remove all debris, sawdust, scraps, and leave casework
spaces clean.H. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without
warp or bind in compliance with manufacturer’s specifications. Lubricate operatinghardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 Cleaning and protection:A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of
installation.B. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's
recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units.C. Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of casework and
tops from damage by other trades until acceptance of the work by the Owner.
End of Section
Project No. 16-20
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 220001 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS – PROJECT MANUAL MECHANICAL Division 21 – Fire Protection Section 21 05 00: Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods
SECTION 21 05 00 - BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Basic Fire Suppression Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21 Sections, in addition to Division 1, General Requirements. The following are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1.
1. Submittals. 2. Regulatory requirements. 3. Project/site conditions. 4. Sequencing and scheduling. 5. Record documents. 6. Maintenance manuals. 7. Plumbing installation. 8. Cutting and patching.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 2. ASTM A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel
Pipe.(Metric)
C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
210500-2 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
C. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide fire sprinkler piping located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with UL 1887.
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 2. Floor [and Roof] Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on
Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
C. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.
2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
210500-3 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
D. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed.
E. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
F. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
G. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 standard.
H. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating.
D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout : Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for basic fire suppression materials and methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/135M UL listed, threadable, light wall; or ASTM A795/A795M; Schedule 10 black.
1. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings. 2. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"
shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
210500-4 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
3. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon-steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and O-ring uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Conform to NFPA 13.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (15 to 40 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
G. Vertical Support: [Steel riser clamp] [Angle ring].
H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
2.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 43 00 – Quality Control: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Obtain permission from Owner or Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
210500-5 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
F. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
G. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
H. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.
B. Install Work in accordance with State of North Carolina standards.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through footings, partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation.
G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Install hangers to with minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and
adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for
pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping. 6. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers. 7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00 . Hangers
and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Install eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
210500-6 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
L. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing.
M. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
N. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
O. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and install through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00.
B. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping.
C. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
D. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating [,to uniform density and texture].
E. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, and partition, as follows:
a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element.
c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire
rating of structure penetrated.
F. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition and floor as follows:
a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element.
c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device
to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations, apply sealant to both sides of penetration to
completely fill annular space between sleeve and pipe.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 43 00 - Quality Control: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
210500-7 Project No. 16-20
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIAL AND METHODS
B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
B. Clean entire system after other construction is complete.
C. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
End of Section
211313-1 Project No. 16-20
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System to provide coverage for building areas noted.
B. Provide system to NFPA 13 ordinary hazard, Group 1 occupancy requirements.
C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
C. Product Data: Submit data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
D. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified.
E. Design Data: Submit design calculations; signed and sealed by professional engineer
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures.
211313-2 Project No. 16-20
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Design system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of North Carolina.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Store products in shipping containers until installation.
C. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13.
C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Incorporated. 2. Automatic Sprinkler Corp.
B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of North Carolina standards.
C. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible-solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
D. Suspended Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Standard Concealed pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Brass. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color, as selected by architect. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type, temperature rated for specific area hazard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Install Work in accordance with State of North Carolina standards.
C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets.
3.2 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction.
B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new.
End of Section
230500-1 Project No. 16-20
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 Sections, in addition to Division 1, General Requirements. The following are included in this section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1.
1. Submittals. 2. Regulatory requirements. 3. Project/site conditions. 4. Sequencing and scheduling. 5. Record documents.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Increase the number of mechanical related product data, samples, and shop drawings required for your distribution by three copies of each submittal. The owner, architect and engineer will each retain a copy of every submittal.
C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to North Carolina State Building Code.
B. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1, Section 017000 Execution and Contract Closeout. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following as-built conditions:
230500-2 Project No. 16-20
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Size and location of all ductwork, locations of all filters, boxes, terminal units, dampers and other control devices requiring periodic maintenance and repair.
2. Size and location of all piping systems with valves and control devices located and numbered, location of all concealed unions, and other piping accessories requiring maintenance (i.e.., tanks, expansion joints, steam traps, strainers, etc.). Underground piping’s actual locations shall be dimensioned from building columns and actual inverts shall be indicated on the as-built drawings.
3. Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart, refer to Section 230553, “Mechanical Identification”.
4. Equipment locations dimensioned from building columns. 5. Contract modifications, including actual equipment and materials installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and material installation with other building systems.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurement.
C. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the actual equipment to be connected.
D. Coordinate the installation of the required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Install systems, equipment, materials which conform with approved submittals, including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work shown are only diagrammatic in form. Notify Architect where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements.
F. Where mounting heights are not given, install systems, and/or equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
G. Install systems, and equipment level and plumb, and parallel or perpendicular to other building systems.
H. Systems that are must be installed at a specific slope ( e.g...., sanitary waste and vent, steam and condensate piping, etc…) shall have a right of way priority. Provide offsets in other systems as required to allow the priority systems to maintain a proper slope.
I. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, as required to install mechanical systems, and equipment.
J. Install access doors or panels where equipment, dampers, or valves are concealed behind finished surfaces.
230500-3 Project No. 16-20
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
K. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities. Comply with requirements of the governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
L. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair, or replacement, of all equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Remove from site and legally dispose of, unless specifically noted to be turned over to the owner, all material which your workman cut, and/or demolished in the course of completing the project.
B. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. Repair any damage to existing, and/or newly added, building systems occurring as a result of cutting and patching operations of your workman.
C. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
D. Existing surfaces and building components shall be patched using new materials to match existing materials by workmen experienced in installing the building component being patched.
E. Perform cutting and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover work to provide for ill-timed work. 2. Remove and replace defective work, and work not conforming to the requirements of
the Contract Documents. 3. Install new equipment and materials in existing structures. 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 5. Upon written instructions from the Architect/ Engineer, uncover and restore work to
provide for the observation of concealed work by the Architect/Engineer.
End of Section
SECTION 230503 HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:1. Chilled water piping, above grade2. Flanges, unions and couplings.3. Valves.4. Check valves.5. Strainers
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work,apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary tocomplete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding andBrazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brasing Operators.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 50 and 300.
D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
F. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.
G. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate andElevated Temperatures.
H. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
I. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessaryjoining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations.
C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatusconnections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or otherapparatus.
230503-1Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.
E. Use gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, orvertical risers.
G. Use globe ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
H. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of condenser water pumps.
I. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off orisolating valves are also provided.
J. If butterfly valves to isolate equipment, or at end line where provisions are made to extend theline in the future, the valve shall be lug body type..
M. Use 3/4 inch (20 mm) gate, or ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low pointsof piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Providemanufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9.
D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joiningprocedures.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 017000 Execution and Contract Closeouts.
B. Record actual locations of valves.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 017000 .Execution and Contract Closeouts.
B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section withminimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.
C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
230503-2Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state laborregulations.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval ofwelders.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1, Section 016000Product Requirements.
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sectionsof the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1, Section 017000, Execution and Contract Closeouts.
B. Provide two repacking kits for each size and valve type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch (10 mm) wall for sizes 12 inch (300 mm) andover, black.1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.2. Joints: Threaded or AWS D1.1 welded.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.3. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535
degrees F (220 to 280 degrees C).
2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) malleable iron, threaded.
230503-3Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches (50 mm):1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on.2. Copper Piping: Bronze.3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion.2. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30
degrees F (-34 degrees C) to 230 degrees F (110 degrees C).3. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier.
2.4 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel,inside screw, single wedge or disc, threaded ends.1. Nibco Model T-113. 2. Stockham Model B-112. 3. Crane Model 438.4. Jenkins Model 992-AJ.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outsidescrew and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.1. Nibco Model F617-O2. Milwaukee Model F2885. 3. Crane Model 465-1/2
2.5 GLOBE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, insidescrew, renewable composition disc, screwed ends, with back seating capacity (repackable underpressure).1. Nibco Model T-211. 2. Stockham Model B-16. 3. Crane Model 1. 4. Jenkins Model 106-BJ.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outsidescrew and yoke, rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.1. Nibco Model F718-B.2. Milwaukee Model F2981. 3. Crane Model 357
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):1. Nibco Model LD-2000-3.
230503-4Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
2. Milwaukee Model ML12BE. 3. Crane Model 14TL.
B. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends, extendedneck.
C. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
D. Operator: 10 position lever handle for pipe sizes up to including 6”. Infinite position lever handlewith memory stop for butterfly valves used for balancing. Handwheel and gear drive for pipesizes 8” and larger.
2.7 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, Teflonseats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends.1. Apollo Model 70-100 Series.2. Nibco Model T-580-70.3. Watts Model B-6000.
2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze swing disc, screwed ends.1. Nibco Model T-413. 2. Crane Model 37. 3. Jenkins Model 352-CJ. 4. Stockham Model B-319.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc,renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.1. Nibco Model F-918-B. 2. Crane Model 373. 3. Milwaukee Model F2974.
2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring,resilient seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.1. Nibco Model W-920-W. 2. Grinnell Model 300. 3. Stockham Model WG970.
2.11 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body temperature and pressure relief valve, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs,automatic, direct pressure actuated, stainless steel thermostat tube, vacuum relief vent in body,and ASME certified and labeled capacities.1. Watts Series 40L.2. Combracco3. Cash ACME
2.12 STRAINERS
230503-5Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under: Screwed brass body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure,Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.1. Mueller Model 351M. 2. O. C. Keckley Style F-150. 3. Watts Model 777.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs orcaps.
E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install heating water, chilled water and condenser water, and piping to ASME B31.9.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connectedequipment. Refer to related Sections.
I. Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches
(100 mm).4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 230700.
230503-6Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location ofaccess doors with other trades.
L. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain topof pipe level.
M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, andapply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
N. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer toSection 099000.
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
END OF SECTION 230503
230503-7Project No. 16-20
HYDRONIC PIPING
230529-1 Project No. 16-20
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 23 05 29 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Accessories. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Equipment curbs. 6. Sleeves.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
B. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be manufactured by one of the following acceptable
manufacturers: a. B Line Systems, Inc. b. Grinnell Corp. c. Michigan Hanger Company.
B. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Conform to ASTM F708.
230529-2 Project No. 16-20
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (75 mm): Cast iron hook. 4. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.4 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage (0.5 mm thick) galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage (0.8 mm thick) galvanized steel.
C. Caps: Steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) minimum; 16 gage (1.5 mm) at fire resistant elements.
2.5 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage (1.2 mm) galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch (75 mm) cant, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed, refer to Section 079200.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
F. Firestopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, noncombustible, refer to Section 079200.
G. Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 079200.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2 INSERTS
230529-3 Project No. 16-20
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm).
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
F. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
H. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches (100 mm) thick and extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 033923.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.5 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
230529-4 Project No. 16-20
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
B. Flash pipes projecting 3 inches (75 mm) minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch (25 mm) minimum into hub, 8 inches (200 mm) minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm) sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash, and seal.
C. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for sound control.
D. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches (350 mm) minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.6 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch (25 mm) above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk,air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
A. Section Includes: 1. Submittals 2. Report Forms 3. Test and Balance Procedures.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.
B. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required.
C. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
1.4 REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB forms
B. Forms shall include the following information: 1. Title Page:
a. Company name b. Company address
230593-2 Project No. 16-20
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude
2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date
3. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor
4. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1, Section 017839 Project Record Documents.
B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience, and be certified by AABC or NEBB. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, or a NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor. Reports shall be sealed by a registered Professional Engineer.
B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, ASHRAE - 1992 Systems
230593-3 Project No. 16-20
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Handbook, and NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 013100.
B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 013100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:
1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to
final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 14. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer.
C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.
D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.
E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
230593-4 Project No. 16-20
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 016000.
B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
3.5 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.
B. Use calibrated [Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered] fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system.
C. Confirm air bleeds indicate system is full of water.
D. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.
E. Perform adjustment of water distribution systems by the following measures: 1. Use balancing cocks, valves, and fittings.
F. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless designed for balancing and shut-off functions. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
230593-5 Project No. 16-20
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels.
F. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
J. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.
K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries.
End of Section
SECTION 230700 PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:1. Glass fiber.2. Jackets.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110-Scope of Work,apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary tocomplete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 335 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of HorizontalPipe Insulation; 1995.
B. ASTM C 518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties byMeans of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
C. ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation forNominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 1990 (Reapproved 1998).
D. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with AusteniticStainless Steel; 1992 (Reapproved 1998).
E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2000a.
F. ASTM E 96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, andlocations.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptableworkmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum threeyears experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
230700-1 Project No. 16-20
PIPING INSULATION
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1, Section016000 Product Requirements.
B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification,including product density and thickness.
C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics,and insulation cements.
C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:1. Product shall be manufactured by one of the following acceptable manufacturers.
B. Molded Pipe Insulation: fiber glass with moisture wicking liner, meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible.1. Thermal Conductivity (K-Value): 0.23 Btu in/hr sq. ft degrees F (0.033 W/m K), when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 335 at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).2. Maximum Service Temperature: 350 degrees F (177 degrees C).3. PWJ Jacket: Paperless white all service jacket with vapor transmission rating of 0.04 perms
(0.23 ng/(Pa s sq m)) and evaporation holes, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps(SSL) and butt strips.
4. Fitting Cover Material: cloth, rigid insulation of same thickness, and PVC fitting covers.
C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive1. Manufacturers:
a. Childers Model CP-30.b. Fosters.c. Cimasco.
2. Compatible with insulation.
2.2 JACKETS
A. PVC Jacket and Fitting Covers: molded PVC high-impact jacketing, fitting covers, andaccessories, with fiber glass inserts.
230700-2 Project No. 16-20
PIPING INSULATION
1. For Interior Use: 25/50; flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/50, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E 84.
2. For Exterior Use: Do not use PVC Jacket.3. PVC: Minimum thickness of 0.020 inches (0.508 mm).4. Insulation Inserts: Fiber glass; thermal conductivity (K-value) of 0.26 Btu in/hr sq. ft degrees
F (0.037 W/m K) at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).5. Closures: Stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe.3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.4. PVC fitting covers may be used.5. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
D. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.5. Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density
insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
E. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3.3 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normalconditions, as materials indicated.
3.4 GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESSInch (mm) Inch (mm)
230700-3 Project No. 16-20
PIPING INSULATION
A. Cooling SystemsChilled Beam Supply & Return Water ALL 1-1/2”
END OF SECTION 230700
230700-4 Project No. 16-20
PIPING INSULATION
230710-1 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 230710 DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Glass fiber, flexible.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
C. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
F. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
H. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
230710-2 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1, Section 016000 Product Requirements.
B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness.
C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Product shall be manufactured by one of the following acceptable manufacturers.
a. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp.. b. Schuller International, Inc.. c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH..
B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.039 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 3.0 percent by volume. 4. Density: 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m).
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch
D. Vapor Barrier Tape 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
230710-3 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
D. For ductwork exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and/or finished spaces, insulate with rigid glass fiber, finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
E. Ductwork conveying pretreated outside air from the discharge of the air to air heat exchanger to the inlet of the heat pumps shall be insulated as “outside air intake ducts” as per insulation schedules below.
F. Ductwork conveying exhaust air from the space to the inlet of the air to air heat exchangers shall be insulated as “Exhaust duct” as per insulation schedules below.
3.3 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.
DUCTWORK THICKNESS FINISH Inch (mm) Exhaust Ducts Within 1 (25) 10 ft (3 m) of Exterior Openings Outside Air Intake Ducts 2 (50) Supply Ducts 2 (50) Return and Relief Ducts 1 (25)
End of Section
233000-1 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 233000 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Volume Control Dampers. 2. Flexible Duct Connectors. 3. Duct Access Doors. 4. Duct Test Holes.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1, Section 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 013323 , for fire dampers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 36 inch (300 x 900 mm).
C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch (300 x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
D. Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
233000-2 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
E. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750 mm) provide regulator at both ends.
F. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 36 oz per sq yd (1.22 kg/sq m), approximately 6 inches (150 mm) wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
C. Leaded vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch (14 mm) thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft (4.2 kg/sq m), 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.
2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch (25 mm) thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches (300 mm) square may be secured with sash locks.
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches (450 mm) square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm). Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.4 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
233000-3 Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
C. Use of splitter dampers is not acceptable.
D. Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Cover connections to medium and high pressure fans with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.
F. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size for shoulder access, and as indicated.
G. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
End of Section
233100-1
Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK
SECTION 233100 DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Low Pressure Duct.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011100-Scope of Work,
apply to the Work of this Section. Additional Requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook 1981 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct Design. B. ASHRAE - Handbook 1983 Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction. C. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. D. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process. F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot- Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. I. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. J. SMACNA - High Pressure Duct Construction Standards. K. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1/2 inch WG (125 Pa) positive or negative
static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm (10 m/sec); 1 inch WG (250 Pa) positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm (12.7 m/sec) and 2 inch WG (500 Pa) positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm (12.7 m/sec).
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.
233100-2
Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 013323, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples.
B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start
of work for low pressure, medium and high pressure systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1, Section 016000 Product Requirements.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Noncombustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of
1.25 oz per sq ft (382 g/sq m) for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Flexible Ducts: fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel bands; rated
to 2 inches WG (500 Pa) positive and 1.5 inches WG (375 Pa) negative for low pressure ducts and 15 inches WG (3.75 kPa) positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.
D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed
by seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F (0.034 KSI at 24 degrees C).
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. F. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials;
liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
G. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. All low pressure supply duct shall be fabricated to meet a pressure classification of +1” w.g..
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of
equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.
233100-3
Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible.
Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.
E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where
easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch (200 mm) and
smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities. C All longitudinal and traverse joints, seams and connections of supply and return ducts
operating at a static pressure less than or equal to 2” w.g. shall be securely fastened and sealed with gaskets, gaskets, mastics, mastic plus embedded fabric systems or tapes installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
C. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above floor. Arrange door swings so that
fan static pressure holds door in closed position. D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with one foot (300 mm) maximum
length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet (1.8 m) maximum length of
flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Low Pressure Supply Steel, (Heating Systems)
233100-4
Project No. 16-20
DUCTWORK
Low Pressure Supply Steel (System with Cooling Coils) Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel Combustion Air Steel
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
End of Section
238226-1 Project No. 16-20
SECTION 23 82 26 – INDUCTION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary A. This Section includes the following:
1. Active Beams
1.2 Related Documents A. 230500 – Basic Mechanical Requirements B. 230503 – Hydronic Piping
1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-
power ratings, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicated dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations and size of each field connection.
1. Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size & location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access
panels, and special moldings.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For active or passive beam units to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals
1.4 Quality Assurance A. Product Options: Drawings indicating size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of active or passive
beam units and are based on the specific system indicated.
B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
238226-2 Project No. 16-20
C. Active or passive beams and accessories shall be rated and tested for pressure as shown on the Drawings.
1.5 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of active or passive beams and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers A. In Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 Active Beams A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Price 2. Semco 3. Titus 4. Trane 5. Alternates: Alternates or approved equals are acceptable if and only if a mock up and witness test
is performed to demonstrate that the substitution meets design criteria.
B. Operation: 1. Active beam shall utilize induction of room air across a water coil mounted within the unit to
provide sensible cooling or heating when required. The induced air shall mix with primary air and discharge evenly into the room via lateral discharge slots.
C. Configuration: 1. Active beams shall consist of an air inlet, pressurization cavity, induction nozzles, enclosed single
water coil, 2-pipe or 4-pipe water connections as indicated on the drawings, induction face grille or perforated panel, and shall have either a 1-sided or 2-sided discharge as per contract schedule.
D. Active beam capacity shall be tested and certified by manufacturer in accordance with EN Standard 15116 to meet the performance listed on the schedule. Should any performance rating, including supply air volume, chilled water supply temperature, plenum static pressure, etc; deviate from the schedule, Manufacturer shall submit updated capacity, throw and noise data collected as described in Section 2.4 as well as computational fluid dynamic modeling demonstrating that any changes to not impact the air distribution in a room that would cause a detriment to the PMV and ADPI rating from the design conditions. Manufacturer shall have factory testing facility available to perform performance test of units in accordance with said standard, as required. Upon request, up to 1% of units for the project can be tested
238226-3 Project No. 16-20
in accordance with the standard. Request will be made with order and prior to shipment of active beams. Engineer will have the option of witnessing this test.
E. Casing: Air plenum shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanneal steel, consisting of at least one (1) air inlet. The frame shall be constructed of 0.060” aluminum extrusion.
F. Water Coil: Coil shall consist of copper tubing mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be leak tested by manufacture to 450 PSI and have a working pressure of 250 psi and shall be AHRI 410 certified. Water connections shall be one end only. Water connections shall be ½” and be suitable for solder, compression fittings, push on fittings or threaded connection. Fin spacing shall be no greater than 10 fins per inch to prevent dust bridging. The coil shall be removable from the room side without requiring the removal of the beam casing from the ceiling. The coil shall include a vent and drain to facilitate maintenance on the unit. The coil pipes shall be upturned 90 degrees.
G. Fastening: Adjustable mounting brackets shall be factory installed along the length of the air plenum on the unit. Each beam shall be individually supported to the building structure by a minimum of 4 laterally adjustable fixing points, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Installation hardware shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and any local codes that dictate hanging requirements.
H. Nozzles: Nozzles shall be of a fixed size, selected based on cooling and heating requirement. Only formed metal nozzles are acceptable.
I. Face: 1. The coil shall be accessible from the room side for inspection and cleaning without the need for
tools through a hinged face supported by the beam casing. i. Room side accessible controls enclosure shall be furnished where indicated ii. Integrated return section shall be furnished where indicated
J. Paint Finish: Internal casing components and exterior shall be painted black, face and frame elements shall be painted white or other color as chosen by the architect. The paint shall be powder coat polyester with 500 hour salt spray rating and periodic cross hatch and bend adhesion tests.
K. Balancing: Integrated pressure port shall be included with k-factor to read the plenum pressure and corresponding supply air volume.
L. Water and air connections shall be shipped sealed to limit the introduction of dust / dirt during shipping and construction.
M. Accessories: 1. Manufacturer shall supply 12”/18” stainless steel braided hose with isolation ball valves 2. Integral manual inlet balancing damper shall be included with locking handle where indicated on
the drawings.
238226-4 Project No. 16-20
2.3 Source Quality Control A. Identification: Label each active or passive beam with appropriate tag number.
B. Verification of Performance: 1. Rate active beam capacity in accordance with EN Standard 15116, active beam throw and noise
criterion in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70. Active beam supplier shall also provide generated noise in octave bands 2-7, measured as specified in ASHRAE Standard 130.
2. Rate passive beam capacity in accordance with EN Standard 14518.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Pre-Design Services
A. Bid shall include the costs to complete final selections and coordination with the Engineer at the Engineers office. Allow for a minimum of three (3) days.
3.2 Installation – General A. Install active or passive beam level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal services,
maintenance, or in accordance with construction drawings.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and perform the following:
1. Verify inlet duct connections are as recommended by manufacture to achieve proper performance. 2. Verify controls and control enclosures are accessible. 3. Verify control connections are complete to control valves as needed. 4. Verify that any identification tags are visible. 5. Verify controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.3 Connections A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicated general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties
B. Install piping adjacent to active or passive beams to allow service and maintenance.
C. In addition to Division 23 Section “Hydronic Piping”, connect coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange, and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
D. Connect ducts to active beams according to Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts”.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening
238226-5 Project No. 16-20
3.4 Field Quality Control A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing active or passive beam and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to conform to proper unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report any findings in writing.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 Cleaning And Protection A. Clean all visible surfaces of equipment; touch up as required.
B. Protect all units before, during and after installation. Damaged materials due to improper protection shall be cause for rejection.
3.6 Construction Phase Services A. Installer shall visit the active or passive beam factory, or factory-authorized representative, prior to the
arrival of the product on site, to become familiar with the beams. Manufacturer shall include the cost of such a visit for one (1) installer in the bid.
B. Manufacturer or factory-authorized representative shall visit the site regularly during the installation process to ensure proper means and methods are being employed. Bid shall include the cost of a minimum of two (2) such visits.
C. Manufacturer or factory-authorized representative shall provide start-up and training services to Owners staff to adjust, operate, and maintain active or passive beam. Refer to Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training”. A minimum of eight (8) hours of such services shall be included in bid.
End of Section
Jim
Typewritten Text
Rev 1: 8/31/16 SCO Comments
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Grout. 4. Common electrical installation requirements. 5. Division of work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Not required.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Panels and Frames."
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. EMT: Ans I C80.1.
2.2 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
F. Listing and Labeling:
1. Provide material and equipment with electrical components that are Listed and Labeled. The terms “Listed” and “Labeled” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling of Equipment shall be by third party agencies accredited to label electrical and mechanical equipment.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 3
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless noted otherwise.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 6 inches above finished floor level. Extend sleeves installed in walls 2” on either side of penetration. Provide plastic bushing on ends of all pipe sleeves.
F. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
G. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".
H. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
I. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
J. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 4
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 DIVISION OF WORK
A. This section delineates the division of work between Division 23 and Division 26.
B. Specific work to be done under Division 26 is hereinafter listed or described. All other work necessary for the operation of Division 23 equipment shall be performed under Division 23.
C. All individual motor starters and drives for mechanical equipment (fans, pumps, etc.) shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 unless indicated as a part of a motor control center. Motor starters for mechanical equipment provided in motor control centers shall be furnished under Division 26.
D. Under Division 26, power wiring shall be provided up to a termination point consisting of a junction box, trough, starter, VFD or disconnect switch. Under Division 26 line side terminations shall be provided. Wiring from the termination point to the mechanical equipment, including final connections, shall be provided under Division 23.
E. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished and wired by Division 26, installed by Division 23. Fire alarm AHU shut down circuits shall be wired from the fire alarm control panel to a termination point, adjacent to the AHU control, under Division 26. AHU control wiring from the termination point to the equipment shall be under Division 23.
F. Equipment less than 110 Volt, all relays, actuators, timers, seven-day clocks, alternators, pressure, vacuum, float, flow, pneumatic-electric, and electri-pneumatic switches, aquastats, freezestats, line and low voltage thermostats, thermals, remote selector switches, remote push-button stations, emergency break-glass stations, interlocking, disconnect switches beyond termination point, and other appurtenances associated with equipment under Division 23 shall be furnished, installed and wired under Division 23.
G. All wiring required for controls and instrumentation not indicated on the drawings shall be furnished and installed by Division 23.
H. Roof exhaust fans with built-in disconnects provided under Division 23 shall be wired under Division 26 to the line side of the disconnect switch. A disconnect switch shall be provided under Division 26 if the fan is not provided with a built-in disconnect switch. In this case, wiring from the switch to the fan shall be under Division 23.’
I. The sequence of control for all equipment shall be as indicated on the Division 23 Drawings and specified in Division 23 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”.
J. Horsepower for all motors shall be indicated on the Division 23 and Division 26 Drawings.
K. All sprinkler flow and tamper switches shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 and wired under Division 26.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 5
L. Where electrical wiring is required by trades other than covered by Division 26, specifications for that section shall refer to same wiring materials and methods as specified under Division 26. No Exceptions.
END OF SECTION 260500
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper Unless Otherwise noted on the electrical drawings. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
C. MC or AC cable is not allowed.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
G. Circuits may not share neutral conductors.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5
cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance
with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. For use at building exterior and main electrical room.
3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. For interior use (except main electrical room).
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring and
telecommunications rough-ins. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and
cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
C. Access Panel Drawings: For all NEC required access panels in gyp or “hard” ceilings, provide a drawing showing location and size of all proposed access panels. Drawing must be approvied by Architect prior to routing any conduit.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. E. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1;
listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT (All Sizes): Plated-Steel, Hexagonal Compression type. No pot metal, set screws
or indented type couplings shall be utilized. F. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and
compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.2 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type [1], unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps,
end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: As indicated E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless
otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.4 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-in (16-mm) trade size Indoors, 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size Outdoors. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where
requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect
conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than
200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. J. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
L. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install
box flush with surface of wall.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5
M. In areas with gyp (“hard”) ceilings – provide all required access panels per NEC requirements. Contractor shall minimize number of access panels and shall submit location plan (as detailed in part 1.4 of this section) prior to routing any conduit.
3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless
sleeve seal is to be installed. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint
compound for gypsum board assemblies. I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-
resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without
damage or deterioration at time of Final Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for conductors. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 4. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used
in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label
printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other
Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where
devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by
1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured
for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on
a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.4 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with
nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the
location and substrate. F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application. I. Provide conductor color coding legend per NEC 210.5 and 215.12. J. Label all junction box coverplates with circuit number and panel designation of all circuits contained within
the box. K. Label all recpetacle and switch cover plates with source panel designation and circuit number.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below
for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities
having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V, 3-Phase Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: Match existing color used in building
c. Colors for 240/120-V, 1-Phase Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4
2) Phase B: Red. c. Colors for 480/277-V, 3-Phase Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Match existing color used in building
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum
distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive
warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.
C. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
D. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is
consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate
mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer,
feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Enclosed switches (including equipment safety switches). f. Contactors. g. Junction boxes h. Receptacle and switch coverplates.
3. Nameplate material Colors: a. Blue surface with white core for 120/208 or 120/240 volt equipment. b. Black surface with white core for 277/480 volt equipment. c. Bright red surface with white core for all equipment related to fire alarm system. d. Dark red (burgundy) surface with white core for all equipment related to Security. e. Green surface with white core for all equipment related to "emergency" systems. f. Orange surface with white core for all equipment related to telephone systems. g. Brown surface with white core for all equipment related to data systems. h. White surface with black core for all equipment related to paging systems. i. Purple surface with white core for all equipment related to TV systems.
END OF SECTION 260553
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 1
SECTION 260923 – NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 2
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lutron or comparable product by one of the following:
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
5. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights
off when selected lighting level is present.
C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-(150-mm-) minimum movement of any
portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 3
detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 360deg circular area of 2000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch-(2440-mm-) high ceiling.
2.2 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lutron or comparable product by one of the following:
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C). 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent/LED at 120 V, 1200-VA
fluorescent/LED at 277 V.
2.3 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. TORK 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.
1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lx), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,
and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.
2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 4
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 5. Hubbell Lighting. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Electrically held, 277V coil. 277VAC, 30A HID Rated contacts. 1. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation. 2. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 3. Refer to drawing detail. 4. Contacts: Contacts shall be field-convertible from “NO” to “NC” as required.
2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for a complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 5
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
NON-NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL 260923 - 6
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.
3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
3.6 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the
manufacturer’s factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. This service is provided at an additional cost.
B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine-tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors.
END OF SECTION 260923
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches. 3. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
F. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
2. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets installed, but no fewer than two.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour-Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. Lutron
2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:
1. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.5 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20 and FS W-S-896..
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4
C. Configuration: On/Off/Preset. Suitable for use with load served. (LED Typ: 0-10V, 120/277V, 8A max load w/o power pack). No derating required if ganged.
2.7 Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
3. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. Coordinate with owner for exact number of keys to be furnished.
2.8 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with slotted oval head and matching the finish and materials of the plate. Furnished with plate by the plate manufacturer.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Cover plates for flush mounted wiring devices (i.e. switches, receptacles, telephone outlets, etc.) shall be 18-8-302 brushed stainless steel, mid-size, single or ganged as shown on drawings.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and
listed/labeled for use in “wet locations.”
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die cast aluminum thermoplastic with lockable cover.
2.9 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP cable complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5
2.10 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product:
1. Wiremold/Legrand.
B. Description:
1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multi-channeled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly.
2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements. 3. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor
thickness. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and reestablish
fire rating of floor. 5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors
and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
2.11 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
B. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
5. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation: Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Provide mid-size plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Labeling: All receptacle plates shall be labeled on the outside, using labeling tape, to identify the branch circuit supplying the receptacle(s).
H. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
I. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Unless otherwise noted, Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.
J. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout
of illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
2. Section 260943 "Networked Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
3. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor.
B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C. CRI: Color-rendering index.
D. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
E. HID: High-intensity discharge.
F. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast, including BF. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA
Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Installation instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, security system, and partition assemblies.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.
2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified, unless otherwise specified in design drawings. a. Philips (Day-Brite) b. Hubbell Lighting c. Cooper d. Lithonia
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. A19 Pattern. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.156 inch (3.96 mm) minimum unless different thickness is indicated.
J. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5
2.3 LED DRIVERS
A. LED drivers shall be UL 1310 and UL 879A Class 2 compliant. Drivers shall be electronic low-voltage, ELV, “trailing-edge” dimmable, unless noted otherwise. Drivers shall use convection cooling and shall have an operating temperature range of -40 to 55 degrees C. Drivers shall be listed for the environment in which they are located.
B. Driver mean time between failures shall be greater than 100,000 hours at full load and 25 degrees C ambient. EMC shall be compliant to 47CFR, Part2, Part15 and Cispr PUB, 22 Class B. Acoustic noise shall be less than 24dB (20-20k Hz). Power factor shall be greater than 0.97% at full load. Leakage current shall not exceed 300uA.
C. Drivers shall have over-voltage, over-current, and short-circuit protection with auto recovery.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with UL 935 and ANSI C82.11; rapid start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer control is indicated.
1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1, and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher (as specified in Luminaire Schedule). 7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall
be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail, this includes exterior egress fixtures.
9. Universal Voltage Input: 120/277 Volts. 10. Exterior ballasts shall have minimum cold start temperature of zero (0) degrees F.
B. Ballasts for 3-lamp T8, Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens (3-lamp). b. Mid-Level Operation: 67 percent of rated lamp lumens (2-lamp). c. Low-Level Operation: 33 percent of rated lamp lumens (1-lamp).
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and
lamp type indicated.
C. Ballasts for 2-lamp T8, Step-Dimming Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6
a. High-Level Operation (2 Switches On): 100 percent of rated lamp lumens (2-lamp). b. Low-Level Operation (1 Switch On, 1 Switch Off): 50 percent of rated lamp lumens
(2-lamp).
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. BF: 1.04 or higher (as specified in Luminaire Schedule). 4. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and
lamp type indicated.
D. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Type: Electronic, program rapid start. 2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 3. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 4. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 5. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 6. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 7. Transient Protection: Comply with ANSI C62.41 for Category A1 locations. 8. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 9. Total Harmonic Distortion shall not exceed 10% for the primary lamp.
E. Ballasts for compact lamps in non-recessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Power Factor: 98 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with ANSI C62.41 for Category A1 locations. 4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 5. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting temperature.
2.5 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Exit signage shall meet the following standards; NEC, NCSBC, NCEC, NFPA-101 and NEMA Standards.
C. All exit signage shall utilize LED type lamps. Maximum LED failure rate shall not exceed 25% within a seven (7) year term; if this term is exceeded, the manufacturer shall replace the complete unit at no charge to the owner.
D. Internally Lighted Signs:
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. ”Super” T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 3100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise specified, “Super” T8 lamps shall be used rather than “Standard” T8.
C. “Standard” T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1350 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D. “High Output” T5 Programmed-start low-mercury lamps, rated 39 W maximum, nominal length of 34 inches (864 mm), 3500 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) .
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 8
construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C. Support for Luminaries in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: 1. When a recessed luminaire replaces a ceiling tile the luminaire is to be supported at the
two (2) diagonally opposite ends to the steel frame of the building. Supports wires to be the same type as used to support the lay-in ceiling T-grid. Attach one end of the wire to one corner of the luminaire and the other end to the building’s structural system.
2. Recessed luminaire to be secured to the main runners of the T-grid at all four (4) corners using flat head sheet metal screws of sufficient length to secure the luminaire to the grid without damaging or bending the framing or housing of the luminaire. Listed clips identified for use with the type of ceiling framing member(s) and luminaire(s) shall also be permitted.
3. Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install two independent support wires from structure to a tab on the luminaire. Wire shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
D. Suspended Luminaire Support: As follows: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from aircraft cable support system as provided by luminaire
manufacturer and per manufactures recommendations.
E. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between housing and frame and finished surface.
F. Provide plaster frames for recessed luminaires installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate each luminaire location with the ceiling type and provide plaster frames and other devices as required for proper installation.
G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and the National Electrical Code.
H. Support surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the luminaires outlet box stud.
I. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
J. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
BUSINESS CENTER UPFIT 16027 UNCG – MORAN COMMONS BUILDING, GREENSBORO, NC
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 9
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to generator and retransfer to normal.
B. Emergency Exit and Egress Luminaire battery testing: Contractor shall perform a test on each unit after it is permanently installed and charged for a minimum of 24 hrs. Battery shall be tested for 90-minutes to verify compliance with National/State/Local codes (including NEC). Contractor to test batteries 10 days prior to final acceptance by NC SCO. Submit test results to engineer, owner, and state electrical inspector.
C. At Date of Final Acceptance, replace lamps in interior luminaires observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect. 1. Refer to Division 1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in interior lighting
fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Final Acceptance. D. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components. E. Verify normal operation of each luminaire after installation. F. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
G. Corroded Luminaires: During warranty period, replace luminaires that show any signs of corrosion.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior luminaires of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.
B. Protect installed luminaires from damage during remainder of construction period. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of installation of interior luminaires, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
